TWM430792U - Protective cover arranged to protect a display of a tablet computer - Google Patents

Protective cover arranged to protect a display of a tablet computer Download PDF

Info

Publication number
TWM430792U
TWM430792U TW100217428U TW100217428U TWM430792U TW M430792 U TWM430792 U TW M430792U TW 100217428 U TW100217428 U TW 100217428U TW 100217428 U TW100217428 U TW 100217428U TW M430792 U TWM430792 U TW M430792U
Authority
TW
Taiwan
Prior art keywords
magnetic
electronic device
attachment
display
attachment feature
Prior art date
Application number
TW100217428U
Other languages
Chinese (zh)
Inventor
Lauder Andrew
Dean Rohrbach Matthew
J Coster Daniel
J Stringer Christopher
W Ow Florence
Ai Jiang
P Ive Jonathan
M Kibiti Elvis
P Ternus John
D Lubner Sean
Original Assignee
Apple Inc
Priority date (The priority date is an assumption and is not a legal conclusion. Google has not performed a legal analysis and makes no representation as to the accuracy of the date listed.)
Filing date
Publication date
Priority claimed from US12/971,624 external-priority patent/US8264310B2/en
Application filed by Apple Inc filed Critical Apple Inc
Publication of TWM430792U publication Critical patent/TWM430792U/en

Links

Classifications

    • GPHYSICS
    • G06COMPUTING; CALCULATING OR COUNTING
    • G06FELECTRIC DIGITAL DATA PROCESSING
    • G06F1/00Details not covered by groups G06F3/00 - G06F13/00 and G06F21/00
    • G06F1/16Constructional details or arrangements
    • GPHYSICS
    • G01MEASURING; TESTING
    • G01RMEASURING ELECTRIC VARIABLES; MEASURING MAGNETIC VARIABLES
    • G01R33/00Arrangements or instruments for measuring magnetic variables
    • G01R33/02Measuring direction or magnitude of magnetic fields or magnetic flux
    • G01R33/06Measuring direction or magnitude of magnetic fields or magnetic flux using galvano-magnetic devices
    • G01R33/07Hall effect devices
    • GPHYSICS
    • G06COMPUTING; CALCULATING OR COUNTING
    • G06FELECTRIC DIGITAL DATA PROCESSING
    • G06F1/00Details not covered by groups G06F3/00 - G06F13/00 and G06F21/00
    • G06F1/16Constructional details or arrangements
    • G06F1/1601Constructional details related to the housing of computer displays, e.g. of CRT monitors, of flat displays
    • G06F1/1607Arrangements to support accessories mechanically attached to the display housing
    • GPHYSICS
    • G06COMPUTING; CALCULATING OR COUNTING
    • G06FELECTRIC DIGITAL DATA PROCESSING
    • G06F1/00Details not covered by groups G06F3/00 - G06F13/00 and G06F21/00
    • G06F1/16Constructional details or arrangements
    • G06F1/1613Constructional details or arrangements for portable computers
    • GPHYSICS
    • G06COMPUTING; CALCULATING OR COUNTING
    • G06FELECTRIC DIGITAL DATA PROCESSING
    • G06F1/00Details not covered by groups G06F3/00 - G06F13/00 and G06F21/00
    • G06F1/16Constructional details or arrangements
    • G06F1/1613Constructional details or arrangements for portable computers
    • G06F1/1626Constructional details or arrangements for portable computers with a single-body enclosure integrating a flat display, e.g. Personal Digital Assistants [PDAs]
    • GPHYSICS
    • G06COMPUTING; CALCULATING OR COUNTING
    • G06FELECTRIC DIGITAL DATA PROCESSING
    • G06F1/00Details not covered by groups G06F3/00 - G06F13/00 and G06F21/00
    • G06F1/16Constructional details or arrangements
    • G06F1/1613Constructional details or arrangements for portable computers
    • G06F1/1633Constructional details or arrangements of portable computers not specific to the type of enclosures covered by groups G06F1/1615 - G06F1/1626
    • GPHYSICS
    • G06COMPUTING; CALCULATING OR COUNTING
    • G06FELECTRIC DIGITAL DATA PROCESSING
    • G06F1/00Details not covered by groups G06F3/00 - G06F13/00 and G06F21/00
    • G06F1/16Constructional details or arrangements
    • G06F1/1613Constructional details or arrangements for portable computers
    • G06F1/1633Constructional details or arrangements of portable computers not specific to the type of enclosures covered by groups G06F1/1615 - G06F1/1626
    • G06F1/1637Details related to the display arrangement, including those related to the mounting of the display in the housing
    • GPHYSICS
    • G06COMPUTING; CALCULATING OR COUNTING
    • G06FELECTRIC DIGITAL DATA PROCESSING
    • G06F1/00Details not covered by groups G06F3/00 - G06F13/00 and G06F21/00
    • G06F1/26Power supply means, e.g. regulation thereof
    • G06F1/28Supervision thereof, e.g. detecting power-supply failure by out of limits supervision

Abstract

A magnetic attachment mechanism is described. The magnetic attachment mechanism can be used to releasably attach at least two objects together in a preferred configuration without fasteners and without external intervention. The magnetic attachment mechanism can be used to releasably attach an accessory device to an electronic device. The accessory device can be used to augment the functionality of usefulness of the electronic device.

Description

M430792 五、新型說明 【新型所屬之技術領域】 本案描述的實施例大體上係有關於可攜式電子裝置。 更明確地,本案的實施例描述很適合可攜式電子裝置之各 式可釋開的附著技術。 【先前技術】 在可攜式運算裝置中的最新發展包括了引進與Apple 公司(設於美國加州Cupertino市)製造的iPadTM平板電腦 有關之手持式電子裝置及運算平台。這些手持式運算裝置 可被建構來讓該電子裝置的一大部分爲用來呈現視覺內容 之顯示器形式,只留很有限的可用空間給附著機構,該附 著機構可被用來附裝配件裝置。 傳統的附著技術大體上係倚賴機械式緊固件,其典型 地需要在該電子裝置上有至少一可從外部接近的附著特徵 構造(attaching feature)用來與該配件裝置上的一對應的附 著特徵構造相匹配。外部附著特徵構造的存在會讓該手持 式運算裝置的整體外觀喪失吸引力並增加所不想要的 (unwanted)重量及複雜度以及破壞該手持式運算裝置的外 形。 因此,一種用來將至少兩個物件可釋開地附著在一起 的機構是所想要的。 【新型內容】 -3- M430792 本案描述與將配件可釋開地附著至電子裝置的系統、 方法、及設備有關的各式實施例。 一種電子裝置包括第一磁性附著特徵構造其被包覆在 該電子裝置的第一側壁內且靠近該第一側壁。該第一磁性 附著特徵構造包括第一磁性元件,及保持機構(retaining mechanism)其被耦接至外殻且被設置來提供一保持力,及 其中當從一不作用的(inactive)狀態改變至一有作用的 (active)狀態時,該磁性元件抵抗該保持力朝向該第一側 壁移動一Δχ的距離。 在另一實施例中,一種電子裝置包括至少一具有側 壁、一底面及一頂側開口的外殼,一設置在該開口內的顯 示裝置,一在該顯示裝置上的防護層,一第一磁性附著機 構其被包覆在該外殼內且位在一靠近該外殼的一第一側壁 的第一位置。該第一磁性附著機構包括一第一磁性元件, 及一保持機構其被耦接至該外殼且被設置來提供一保持 力,在該第一側壁的外表面的磁通量密度小於一預定的門 檻値的一不作用的狀態中,該保持力將該磁性元件保持在 —遠離該第一側壁的第一位置,及其中在一有作用的狀態 中,該磁性元件對抗該保持力朝向該第一側壁移動一 Δχ 的距離。 —種具有一外殼的電子裝置包括至少一雙態磁性元 件,其被設置在該外殻內的第一側壁且被設置來在第一狀 態中在該第一側壁的外表面提供一第一磁性表面,該第一 磁性表面不適合磁性附著物且不會實質地影響磁性敏感裝 -4 - M430792 置,其中在第二狀態中,該雙態磁性元件在該第一側壁的 該外表面提供一第二磁性表面’該第二磁性表面適合磁性 附著物且一狀態保持機構被耦接至該外殼且被設置來將該 雙態磁性元件保持在該第一狀態,除非該雙態磁性元件受 到外部激活器(activat〇r)作用。 本創作的其它態樣及優點從下面配合附圖的詳細描述 中變得很清楚,該等附圖以示範的方式例示被描述的實施 例的原理。 【實施方式】 現將詳細參考附圖中所示的代表性實施例。應被理解 的是,下面的描述並不要將該等實施例限制到一較佳的實 施例。相反地,這些說明是要涵蓋可被包括在申請專利範 圍所界定的該等被描述的實施例的精神與範圍內的替代方 案、變化及等效物。 下面的描述大體上與一可被用來將至少兩個被適當地 建構的物件附著在一起的機構有關。在一實施例中,這可 在無需使用到傳統的緊固件下達成。該等物件的每一者可 包括一被設置來提供一具有適當的特性的磁場的附著特徵 構造。當該附著特徵構造被放置成彼此近接時,該等磁場 可根據它們各自的特性合作地相互作用,讓該等物件以一 種所想要的且可重覆的方式彼此磁性地附著。例如,至少 部分因爲磁場的合作性的相互作用的本質,該等物件可在 沒有外部的介入干預之下彼此附著於一預定的位置及相對 M430792 方位。例如,該合作性的磁性相互作用可造成該等物件自 行對準及自行定心於一所想要的方位上的結果。 該等物件可保持在一磁性附著的狀態,直到一足以克 服整體的淨吸附磁力之夠大的釋開力量被施加爲止。然 而’在某些情形中,希望能夠依序地分離該等物件(譬如 像是拉鏈之類者),在此情形中,該釋開力量每一次只需 要大到足以克服一對磁性元件的淨磁吸力即可。不需要連 接器,譬如機械式緊固件,來將該等物件附著在一起。再 者,爲了防止對該等磁性附著特徵構造之間的磁性相互作 用有不當的干擾,該等物件在該等磁性附著特徵構造附近 的至少一部分可用無磁性作用的材料,譬如塑膠,或不含 鐵的金屬,譬如鋁或非磁性不銹鋼,製成。 該等物件可以有許多形式且實施許多功能。當該等物 件彼此磁性地附著時,它們可彼此通信且互動以形成一合 作系統(cooperative system)該合作系統可實施操作並提供 分開的個別物件所無法提供的功能。在另一實施例中,至 少一裝置可被用作爲配件裝置。該配件裝置可被磁性地附 著到至少一電子裝置。該配件裝置可提供可被用來強化該 電子裝置的操作性的服務及功能。例如,該配件裝置可以 是一可磁性地附著至該電子裝置之保護蓋的形式。該保護 蓋可在提高該電子裝置的整體外觀及質感的同時對該電子 裝置的某些部分(譬如,顯示器)提供保護。該被用來將該 配件裝置與該電子裝置磁性地附著在一起的磁性附著機構 可確保該保護蓋可以一特定的方位附著至該電子裝置。再 -6- M430792 者,該磁性附著機構亦可確保該保護蓋與該電子裝置的適 當對準及定位。 • 該保護蓋可包括至少一鉸鏈部分。該鉸鏈部分可藉由 . 使用一磁性附著特徵構造而被磁性地附著至該電子裝置。 該鉸鏈部分可被樞軸地連接至一摺片(flap)其被設置在該 電子裝置的一個需要被保護的部分上。該保護蓋可包括能 夠與該電子裝置內的電子元件合作的電子電路或其它(被 φ 動或主動)元件》訊號可被傳送於該保護蓋與該電子裝置 之間以作爲該合作的一部分,該等訊號可被用來更改該電 子裝置的操作、該保護蓋的電子電路或元件的操作、及其 它等等。 作爲一個例子,該電子裝置可包括一磁性敏感電路, 譬如霍耳效應(Hall Effect)感測器,因而可偵測一磁場的 存在。該霍耳效應感測器可藉由產生一訊號來作爲對一磁 場存在的反應。該訊號可被用來改變該電子裝置的操作狀 φ 態》因此,該保護蓋可包括一磁性元件,譬如一具有可造 成該霍耳效應感測器產生訊號的磁場的永久磁鐵。該磁性 元件可被設置在該保護蓋上的一個當該保護蓋被放置在該 電子裝置的一表面上或緊鄰該表面時可觸動該霍耳效應感 測器產生該訊號的位置處。該訊號可指出該保護蓋位在相 對於該電子裝置的一個可以造成該電子裝置的操作狀態改 變的預定的位置。例如,當該保護蓋具有該磁性元件的部 分緊鄰該霍耳效應感測器時,來自該磁性元件的磁場會造 成該霍耳效應感測器產生一訊號》該訊號可被用來將該操 M430792 作狀態改變爲與該電子裝置的顯示器被完全覆蓋相符的狀 態。在另一方面,當該保護蓋具有該磁性元件的部分被移 開至該霍耳效應感測器不再會對該磁性元件的磁場有反應 的地點時,該霍耳效應感測器可產生另一訊號。該另一訊 號可讓該電子裝置進入該顯示器的至少一部分被掀開且可 看到之另一個不同的操作狀態。 這些及其它的實施例係參考圖1-35在下文中被討 論。然而,熟習此技藝者將可瞭解的是,在本文中被提供 之關於這些圖式的細部描述只是爲了說明的目的,其不應 被解讀爲是對本創作的限制。關於此討論的其餘部分,將 描述依據被描述的實施例被適當地建構來彼此磁性地附著 在一起的第一及第二物件。應指出的是,任何數量及類型 之被適當地建構的物件都可以精確且可重覆的方式被磁性 地彼此附著。詳言之,爲了簡化及清楚起見,關於此討論 的其餘部分,該第一物件被假定爲一電子裝置的形式且特 別是一種手持式電子裝置。 圖1爲以一種所想要的且可重覆的方式彼此可釋開地 附著在一起的物件10與電子裝置12的一簡化的方塊圖。 詳言之,物件10與電子裝置12可在沒有外部介入干預及 沒有使用機械式緊固件下在預定的位置及相對的方位彼此 附著在一起。該物件10與電子裝置12可保持彼此附著在 —起直到一可克服它們之間的嚙合的釋開力量被施加爲 止。然而,在某些情形中,將該物件10與電子裝置 12(如拉鏈之類者)依序地分開是所想要的,在此情形中, M430792 一能夠解開該物件1〇與電子裝置12之間的嚙合的釋開 力量每次被施加於一附著構件附近。例如,一附著構件可 包括一被適當地匹配的磁性元件對,一個磁性元件在物件 10中及另一個磁性元件在該電子裝置12中。 電子裝置12可以有許多形式。例如,電子裝置!2可 以是一可攜式電子裝置》在某些例子中,該可攜式電子裝 置可包括外殼15。外殼15可包覆該可攜式電子裝置的的 構件並提供該等構件支撐。外殼15亦可爲佔據該可攜式 電子裝置的正面絕大部分的大且顯著的顯示器提供支撐。 該顯示器可被用來呈現視覺內容。該視覺內容包括靜態影 像、視覺(visual)、文字資料、以及圖形資料其包括被用 作爲圖形使用者界面(GUI)的一部分的圖像(iC0ns)。 在某些情形中,該顯示器的至少一部分可以是觸碰敏 感的(touch sensitive)。觸碰敏感係指在一觸碰事件中, 一物件(如,手指、觸寫筆等等)可與該顯示器的上表面接 觸或緊鄰。該觸碰事件的詳細情況(位置、壓力、持續時 間等等)可被用來提供資訊給該可攜式電子裝置以進行處 理。在一些實施例中,資訊除了被提供給該可攜式電子裝 置之外,資訊可藉由使用例如密著性致動器(haptic actuator)以觸覺的方式被該可攜式電子裝置提供。應被理 解的是,此組態是舉例的方式而不是限制的方式,因爲該 電子裝置可以廣泛地變化。在一例子中,該可攜式電子裝 置是平板電腦,譬如像是由設在美國加州Cupertino的 Apple公司製造的iPad™。 -9 - M430792 物件ι〇可以廣泛地變化且可以有許多形式,譬如像 是該電子裝置12的附件或配備。作爲一附件,該物件1〇 可被建構成一外蓋、一支架、一底座(dock)、一輸入/輸出 裝置等等。在一特別有用的形式中,該物件10可以是一 保護蓋的形式,其可包括一被設置在該可攜式電子裝置的 顯示器上的構件,譬如一摺片(flap)。與該電子裝置12 — 樣地,該物件10亦可包括外殼17其可包覆該物件10的 構件並提供該等物件支撐。 該物件10或電子裝置12的一者或兩者可包括附著特 徵構造(attachment feature)。例如,物件 10可包括附著 系統13且該電子裝置12可包括對應的附著系統14。附 著系統13可與該對應的附著系統14合作,用以以一種可 釋開的方式來附著該物件10與該電子裝置12。當該物件 10與該電子裝置12彼此附著時,它們可分開動作,且如 果有需要時可如兩個獨立的部件般地動作。附著系統13 及14係以該物件10與該電子裝置12可以所想要的且可 重覆的方式彼此附著的方式被建構。換言之,附著系統 13及14可重複地將該物件10與該電子裝置12對準在一 起,致使它們在一相對於彼此的預定位置上是一致的。 該等附著特徵構造可廣泛地變化。該附著可由各式的 耦接來提供,其包括機械的、電子的、靜電的、磁性的、 摩擦的、及/或類此者的形式。在一實施例中,該附著不 能從該物件及/或電子裝的外部被看到。例如,該物件與 該電子裝置不能包括對於外觀及質感或美感外觀有不利影 -10- M430792 響之外部可看到的附著特徵構造(如,按扣、銷栓等等), 但可包括不會從該物件或電子裝置的外部被看到且不會對 • 該物件或電子裝置的外觀及質感或美感外觀有不利影響的 . 附著特徵構造。舉例而言,該等附著特徵構造可由不會破 壞該物件或電子裝置的外表面的吸力表面來提供。在一實 施例中,該等附著特徵構造的至少一部分利用磁性吸力來 提供該吸力的一部分或全部。 ^ 該等附著系統可包括一或多個附著特徵構造。如果使 用多個特徵構造的話,它們的固定方式可以是相同的亦或 可以是不同的。例如,在一實施方式中,一第一附著特徵 構造利用一第一附著機構,而一第二附著特徵構造則利用 一不同於該第一附著機構的第二附著機構。例如,該第一 附著機構可利用摩擦耦合,而該第二附著機構則可利用磁 力。在另一種實施方式中,一第一附著特徵構造利用一第 一附著機構,而一第二附著特徵構造則利用相同或類似的 Φ 附著機構。例如,該第一及第二附著機構可由磁鐵來提 供。雖然,該附著機構可以是類似的機構,但應被瞭解的 是,該等特徵構造的組態(configuration)可以根據該系統 的需要而不同。又,任何數量及組態的附著機構都可被使 用。 在所示的實施例中,該等附著系統1 3及1 4的每一者 都包括至少一第一組對應的附著特徵構造13 a/14a及一第 二組對應的附著特徵構造13b/14b。附著特徵構造13a可 與對應的附著特徵構造l4a合作,用以用一可釋開的方式 -11 - M430792 來附著該物件10與該電子裝置12。在一特定的實施方式 中,這是藉由磁吸力來達成。又,附著特徵構造13b可與 對應的附著特徵構造14b合作,用以用一可釋開的方式來 進一步附著該物件10與該電子裝置12。舉例而言’附著 特徵構造13a/14a可被設置在第一位置,而附著特徵構造 13b/14b可被設在第二位置》 在一特定的例子中,與附著特徵構造13a合作的該附 著特徵構造14a將該電子裝置12固定至物件10。在另一 例子中,附著特徵構造13b藉著使用附著特徵構造14b可 將物件10固定至電子裝置12。應指出的是,此例子的附 著系統13及14可以是分開的或它們可一起合作以產生該 附著。如果它們合作的話,附著特徵構造14a及14b對應 到一或多個附著特徵構造13a及13b在任何一種情形中, 該等附著特徵構造在這些例子的任何一者中可藉由機械 的、靜電的、吸附的(suction)、磁性的附著及/或類此者 來達成。 該等附著系統及附著系統內的該等附著特徵構造的放 置可廣泛地變化。關於電子裝置12,附著系統14可被放 置在前面、後面、頂部、底部、及/或側邊。附著特徵構 造14a及14b可被放置在該附著系統14內昨任何位置。 因此,附著特徵構造14a及14b可被放置在相對於該外殻 及/或該顯示器的任何地方。在一例子中,附著特徵構造 1 4a及1 4b可沿著該外殼的側面的一或多個者(如,頂側、 底側、左側、右側)提供嚙合。在另一例子中,附著特徵 -12- M430792 構造14a及14b可在該電子裝置12的背面提供嚙合。在 又另一個例子中,附著特徵構造14a及14b可在電子裝置 • 12的正面(如,顯示器所在之處,如果有顯示器的話)提供 . 嚙合。在一些情形中,該等附著特徵構造的組合可位在電 子裝置12的不同區域,例如,在側邊及正面。在一實施 例中,包括附著特徵構造14a及14b的附著系統14並不 會破壞電子裝置12的表面。相類似地,附著系統13,特 I 別是附著特徵構造13a及13b,不會破壞物件10的表M430792 V. New Description [Technical Field of the Invention] The embodiments described in the present invention are generally related to portable electronic devices. More specifically, the embodiments of the present invention describe various releasable attachment techniques that are well suited for portable electronic devices. [Prior Art] Recent developments in portable computing devices include the introduction of handheld electronic devices and computing platforms related to the iPadTM tablet manufactured by Apple Inc. (Cupertino, Calif.). These handheld computing devices can be constructed such that a large portion of the electronic device is in the form of a display for presenting visual content, leaving only a limited amount of available space for the attachment mechanism that can be used to attach the accessory device. Conventional attachment techniques generally rely on mechanical fasteners, which typically require at least one attachable feature that is accessible from the outside for attachment to a corresponding attachment feature on the accessory device. The construction matches. The presence of an externally attached feature configuration can detract from the overall appearance of the handheld computing device and increase the unwanted weight and complexity and damage the appearance of the handheld computing device. Therefore, a mechanism for releasably attaching at least two articles together is desirable. [New Content] -3- M430792 This description describes various embodiments relating to systems, methods, and devices that releasably attach an accessory to an electronic device. An electronic device includes a first magnetic attachment feature configured to be wrapped within a first sidewall of the electronic device proximate the first sidewall. The first magnetic attachment feature includes a first magnetic element, and a retaining mechanism coupled to the housing and configured to provide a retention force, and wherein when changing from an inactive state to In an active state, the magnetic element moves a distance of Δχ toward the first side wall against the holding force. In another embodiment, an electronic device includes at least one outer casing having a side wall, a bottom surface, and a top side opening, a display device disposed in the opening, a protective layer on the display device, and a first magnetic An attachment mechanism is enclosed within the outer casing and positioned in a first position adjacent a first side wall of the outer casing. The first magnetic attachment mechanism includes a first magnetic component, and a retention mechanism coupled to the housing and configured to provide a retention force, the magnetic flux density on the outer surface of the first sidewall being less than a predetermined threshold In a non-acting state, the holding force holds the magnetic element in a first position away from the first side wall, and in an active state, the magnetic element faces the holding force against the first side wall Move a distance of Δχ. An electronic device having a housing including at least one dual-state magnetic component disposed in a first sidewall within the housing and configured to provide a first magnetic property on an outer surface of the first sidewall in the first state a surface, the first magnetic surface is unsuitable for magnetic attachment and does not substantially affect the magnetically sensitive device-4 - M430792, wherein in the second state, the dual state magnetic element provides a first surface on the outer surface of the first side wall a second magnetic surface adapted to be a magnetic attachment and a state retaining mechanism coupled to the outer casing and configured to retain the two-state magnetic element in the first state unless the dual-state magnetic element is externally activated Activator (activat〇r) role. Other aspects and advantages of the present invention will become apparent from the following detailed description of the drawings. [Embodiment] Reference will now be made in detail to the exemplary embodiments illustrated in the drawings. It should be understood that the following description is not intended to limit the embodiments to a preferred embodiment. Rather, the description is to cover alternatives, modifications, and equivalents, which are included within the spirit and scope of the described embodiments. The following description generally relates to a mechanism that can be used to attach at least two suitably constructed items together. In an embodiment, this can be achieved without the use of conventional fasteners. Each of the items may include an attachment feature configuration configured to provide a magnetic field having appropriate characteristics. When the attachment features are placed in close proximity to one another, the magnetic fields can cooperatively interact according to their respective characteristics, allowing the objects to magnetically attach to each other in a desired and reproducible manner. For example, due at least in part to the nature of the cooperative interaction of the magnetic fields, the objects can be attached to each other at a predetermined location and relative to the M430792 without external interventional intervention. For example, the cooperative magnetic interaction can result in self-alignment of the objects and self-centering in a desired orientation. The articles can be held in a magnetically attached state until a sufficient release force sufficient to overcome the overall net magnetic attraction is applied. However, 'in some cases, it is desirable to be able to separate the objects sequentially (such as, for example, a zipper), in which case the release force only needs to be large enough to overcome the net of a pair of magnetic elements each time. Magnetic attraction is enough. No connectors, such as mechanical fasteners, are required to attach the items together. Furthermore, in order to prevent undue interference with the magnetic interaction between the magnetic attachment features, at least a portion of the objects in the vicinity of the magnetic attachment features may be made of a non-magnetic material, such as plastic, or Made of iron metal, such as aluminum or non-magnetic stainless steel. The objects can take many forms and perform many functions. When the objects are magnetically attached to each other, they can communicate with each other and interact to form a cooperative system that can perform the operations and provide functions that are not provided by separate individual items. In another embodiment, at least one device can be used as an accessory device. The accessory device can be magnetically attached to at least one electronic device. The accessory device provides services and functions that can be used to enhance the operability of the electronic device. For example, the accessory device can be in the form of a protective cover that is magnetically attached to the electronic device. The protective cover provides protection to certain portions of the electronic device (e.g., display) while improving the overall appearance and texture of the electronic device. The magnetic attachment mechanism used to magnetically attach the accessory device to the electronic device ensures that the protective cover can be attached to the electronic device in a particular orientation. Further, in the -6-M430792, the magnetic attachment mechanism can also ensure proper alignment and positioning of the protective cover with the electronic device. • The protective cover may include at least one hinge portion. The hinge portion can be magnetically attached to the electronic device by using a magnetic attachment feature. The hinge portion can be pivotally coupled to a flap that is disposed on a portion of the electronic device that needs to be protected. The protective cover can include an electronic circuit or other (by a φ or active) component capable of cooperating with electronic components within the electronic device to be transmitted between the protective cover and the electronic device as part of the cooperation. The signals can be used to modify the operation of the electronic device, the operation of the electronic circuitry or components of the protective cover, and the like. As an example, the electronic device can include a magnetic sensitive circuit, such as a Hall Effect sensor, to detect the presence of a magnetic field. The Hall effect sensor can generate a signal as a response to the presence of a magnetic field. The signal can be used to change the operational state of the electronic device. Thus, the protective cover can include a magnetic element, such as a permanent magnet having a magnetic field that can cause the Hall effect sensor to generate a signal. The magnetic element can be disposed on the protective cover at a position where the protective cover is placed on or in close proximity to a surface of the electronic device to activate the signal generated by the Hall effect sensor. The signal may indicate that the protective cover is in a predetermined position relative to the electronic device that may cause the operational state of the electronic device to change. For example, when the protective cover has a portion of the magnetic element in close proximity to the Hall effect sensor, a magnetic field from the magnetic element causes the Hall effect sensor to generate a signal that the signal can be used to The M430792 is changed in state to a state in which the display of the electronic device is completely covered. In another aspect, the Hall effect sensor can be generated when the protective cover has a portion of the magnetic element that is removed to a location where the Hall effect sensor no longer reacts to the magnetic field of the magnetic element. Another signal. The other signal allows the electronic device to enter a different operational state in which at least a portion of the display is cleaved and visible. These and other embodiments are discussed below with reference to Figures 1-35. It will be appreciated by those skilled in the art, however, that the detailed description of the drawings is provided for purposes of illustration only and should not be construed as a limitation. With regard to the remainder of this discussion, first and second articles that are suitably constructed to be magnetically attached to each other in accordance with the described embodiments will be described. It should be noted that any number and type of suitably constructed articles can be magnetically attached to one another in a precise and repeatable manner. In particular, for the sake of simplicity and clarity, with respect to the remainder of this discussion, the first object is assumed to be in the form of an electronic device and in particular a handheld electronic device. 1 is a simplified block diagram of an article 10 and an electronic device 12 that are releasably attached to each other in a desired and reproducible manner. In particular, the article 10 and the electronic device 12 can be attached to each other at predetermined locations and relative orientations without external intervention and without the use of mechanical fasteners. The article 10 and the electronic device 12 can remain attached to each other until a release force that overcomes the engagement therebetween is applied. However, in some cases, it is desirable to sequentially separate the article 10 from the electronic device 12 (such as a zipper), in which case the M430792 can unlock the object and the electronic device. The release force of the engagement between the 12 is applied to an attachment member each time. For example, an attachment member can include a suitably matched pair of magnetic elements, one in the article 10 and the other in the electronic device 12. The electronic device 12 can take many forms. For example, an electronic device! 2 can be a portable electronic device. In some examples, the portable electronic device can include a housing 15. The outer casing 15 can enclose and provide support for the components of the portable electronic device. The housing 15 can also provide support for a large and significant display that occupies most of the front side of the portable electronic device. The display can be used to present visual content. The visual content includes still images, visuals, text data, and graphics materials including images (iC0ns) that are used as part of a graphical user interface (GUI). In some cases, at least a portion of the display can be touch sensitive. Touch sensitive means that an object (e.g., a finger, a stylus, etc.) can be in contact with or in close proximity to the upper surface of the display during a touch event. The details of the touch event (location, pressure, duration, etc.) can be used to provide information to the portable electronic device for processing. In some embodiments, in addition to being provided to the portable electronic device, information can be provided tactilely by the portable electronic device using, for example, a haptic actuator. It should be understood that this configuration is by way of example and not limitation, as the electronic device can vary widely. In one example, the portable electronic device is a tablet computer such as the iPadTM manufactured by Apple Inc. of Cupertino, California. -9 - M430792 Objects ι〇 can vary widely and can take many forms, such as attachments or equipment such as the electronic device 12. As an accessory, the object 1 can be constructed as an outer cover, a stand, a dock, an input/output device, and the like. In a particularly useful form, the article 10 can be in the form of a protective cover that can include a member, such as a flap, disposed on the display of the portable electronic device. As with the electronic device 12, the article 10 can also include a housing 17 that can enclose the member of the article 10 and provide support for the articles. One or both of the article 10 or the electronic device 12 can include an attachment feature. For example, article 10 can include attachment system 13 and the electronic device 12 can include a corresponding attachment system 14. Attachment system 13 can cooperate with the corresponding attachment system 14 to attach the article 10 to the electronic device 12 in an releasable manner. When the article 10 and the electronic device 12 are attached to each other, they can move separately and can act as two separate components if needed. The attachment systems 13 and 14 are constructed in such a manner that the article 10 and the electronic device 12 can be attached to each other in a desired and reproducible manner. In other words, the attachment systems 13 and 14 can repeatedly align the article 10 with the electronic device 12 such that they are uniform at a predetermined position relative to each other. These attachment feature configurations can vary widely. The attachment may be provided by a variety of couplings including mechanical, electrical, electrostatic, magnetic, friction, and/or the like. In one embodiment, the attachment cannot be seen from the exterior of the article and/or electronic device. For example, the object and the electronic device may not include an externally visible attachment feature configuration (eg, snaps, pins, etc.) that is detrimental to the appearance and texture or aesthetic appearance - but may include no An attachment feature that is visible from the exterior of the article or electronic device and that does not adversely affect the appearance and texture or aesthetic appearance of the article or electronic device. For example, the attachment features can be provided by a suction surface that does not damage the outer surface of the article or electronic device. In one embodiment, at least a portion of the attachment feature configurations utilize magnetic attraction to provide a portion or all of the suction. ^ The attachment systems can include one or more attachment features. If multiple features are used, they may be fixed in the same way or may be different. For example, in one embodiment, a first attachment feature configuration utilizes a first attachment mechanism and a second attachment feature configuration utilizes a second attachment mechanism that is different from the first attachment mechanism. For example, the first attachment mechanism can utilize frictional coupling and the second attachment mechanism can utilize magnetic force. In another embodiment, a first attachment feature configuration utilizes a first attachment mechanism and a second attachment feature configuration utilizes the same or similar Φ attachment mechanism. For example, the first and second attachment mechanisms can be provided by a magnet. Although the attachment mechanism can be a similar mechanism, it should be understood that the configuration of the feature configurations can vary depending on the needs of the system. Also, any number and configuration of attachment mechanisms can be used. In the illustrated embodiment, each of the attachment systems 1 3 and 14 includes at least a first set of corresponding attachment features 13 a/ 14a and a second set of attachment features 13b/ 14b . The attachment feature 13a can cooperate with a corresponding attachment feature configuration l4a for attaching the article 10 to the electronic device 12 in a releasable manner -11 - M430792. In a particular embodiment, this is achieved by magnetic attraction. Further, the attachment feature 13b can cooperate with a corresponding attachment feature 14b for further attaching the article 10 to the electronic device 12 in a releasable manner. For example, 'the attachment feature 13a/14a can be placed in a first position and the attachment feature 13b/14b can be placed in a second position." In a particular example, the attachment feature in cooperation with the attachment feature 13a The structure 14a secures the electronic device 12 to the article 10. In another example, the attachment feature 13b can secure the article 10 to the electronic device 12 by using the attachment feature formation 14b. It should be noted that the attachment systems 13 and 14 of this example may be separate or they may cooperate together to create the attachment. If they cooperate, the attachment features 14a and 14b correspond to one or more attachment features 13a and 13b. In either case, the attachment features can be mechanically or electrostatically generated in any of these examples. , adsorption, magnetic attachment, and/or the like. The placement of such attachment features within the attachment system and attachment system can vary widely. With respect to electronic device 12, attachment system 14 can be placed on the front, back, top, bottom, and/or sides. Attachment features 14a and 14b can be placed anywhere in the attachment system 14 yesterday. Thus, the attachment features 14a and 14b can be placed anywhere relative to the housing and/or the display. In one example, the attachment features 14a and 14b can provide engagement along one or more of the sides of the housing (e.g., top side, bottom side, left side, right side). In another example, the attachment features -12-M430792 configurations 14a and 14b can provide engagement on the back of the electronic device 12. In yet another example, the attachment features 14a and 14b can be provided on the front side of the electronic device 12 (e.g., where the display is located, if there is a display). In some cases, combinations of such attachment feature configurations may be located in different regions of the electronic device 12, such as on the sides and on the front side. In an embodiment, the attachment system 14 including the attachment features 14a and 14b does not damage the surface of the electronic device 12. Similarly, the attachment system 13, specifically the attachment features 13a and 13b, does not destroy the table of objects 10.

W 面。 根據一實施例,該等附著特徵構造可包括磁性元件。 該等磁性元件可被建構來協助將該物件10相對於電子裝 置12定位成一匹配的配置。該等磁性元件可進一步協助 將該物件10及該電子裝置12固定成一匹配的嚙合。應指 出的是,物件10與電子裝置12的嚙合可藉由施加一可讓 物件1 0與電子裝置1 2分開回到個別物件狀態之適當的釋 φ 開力量而被逆轉。然而,該等磁性元件可在無需任何類型 的緊固件,機械的或其它類型的緊固件之下允許物件10 與電子裝置12隨後重新回復該匹配嚙合。以此方式,該 等磁性元件在該物件10與該電子裝置12之間提供一種可 重複的且一致的嚙合。 該物件10與該電子裝置12可進一步分別包括構件 16及18。構件16及18典型地與該物件10與該電子裝置 12相關,且例如可以是被用來提供支撐的機械的或結構 式構件,或它們可以是可提供特定的操作/功能組的操作 -13- M430792 性/功能性構件。該等構件可專屬於它們各自的裝置或它 們可被建構來用於與對應的物件或裝置的態樣(aspects)耦 合(如,有線的或無線的耦合)。結構性構件的例子可包括 框架、壁、緊固件、加強件、運動機構(鉸鏈)等等。操作 性構件的例子包括處理性、記憶體、電池組、天線、電 路、感測器、顯示器 '輸入等等。根據所想要的組態,該 等構件可以是外部的(如,露在表面上)及/或內部的(如, 嵌埋在外殼內)。 圖2A及2B爲依據一被描述的實施例的物件20的簡 化立體圖,該物件可經由一磁性附著系統而被可釋開地附 著至電子裝置22。物件20與電子裝置22大致對應於參 考圖1所描述的物件及電子裝置。在一實施例中,該磁性 附著系統可被體現爲磁性表面24(以點線及陰影來表示), 更明確地被體現爲在電子裝置22的側邊的磁性表面24。 磁性表面24可在被放置成與物件20內的一對應的附著特 徵構造彼此緊鄰時提供一可與該對應的附著特徵構造合作 的磁場。該磁場可建立一淨磁吸力,其可將該物件20與 該電子裝置22拉在一起成爲如圖2B所示之沿著嚙合表面 26的匹配嚙合。 換言之,該磁性表面24所提供的該磁場可具有可讓 該物件20與該電子裝置22之間的淨磁吸力實質垂直該嚙 合表面26的特性。又,該磁場可讓該物件20與該電子裝 置22之間的淨磁吸力被均勻地施加於該嚙合表面26上。 爲了要釋開該物件20與該電子裝置22,一釋開力量可被 -14- M430792 施加至這兩個結合在一起的物件上,用以克服該磁性附著 系統所提供之淨磁吸力。 * 應被瞭解的是,雖然只有一側壁被示出,但在一些例 * 子中’不同的側壁及側壁的組合可依據該附著界面的需要 被使用。應指出的是’使用磁性附著件排除了對於機械附 著件’譬如緊固件,的需要。又,不用機械式附著件及整 體磁吸力的均勻性可讓該物件20與該電子裝置22的表面 0 不受破壞’這有助於產生同一個整體(oneness)的外觀,在 該同一個整體中該物件20與該電子裝置22看起來像是一 個單一的完整個體。外觀上的均一性可改善該物件20與 該電子裝置22兩者整體的美學外觀。 在一實施例中,一磁性表面可藉由將該附著特徵構造 形式的可磁性地吸引的元件嵌埋在該電子元件22及/或該 物件20內來產生。亦即,該等可磁性地吸引的元件可被 設置在該物件20與該電子裝置22內,例如在該電子裝置 φ 22的外殼內。在此組態中,該外殼可用非磁性材料,譬 如像是塑膠或非鐵金屬,譬如鋁,來製造。以此方式,磁 力線可被建構,用以穿透該外殼的壁。該等附著特徵構造 不會破壞該物件20與該電子裝置22的外表面的實體外 觀。在該物件20與該電子裝置22中的該等可磁性地吸引 的元件可被配置成可產生能夠彼此合作的磁場以產生可將 該物件20與該電子裝置22附著在一起成爲匹配嚙合的磁 吸力的組態。該磁吸力被建構來產生一與該物件20與該 電子裝置22之間的嚙合表面26正交的磁吸力。 -15- M430792 介於該物件20與該電子裝置22內對應的磁性元件之 間的磁吸力亦可沿著該嚙合表面26被均一地施加。沿著 該嚙合表面26的整個磁吸力的均一性可以是該物件20與 該電子裝置22內對應的磁性元件之間分離距離的均一性 的結果。該均一性亦可以是該物件20與該電子裝置22內 對應的磁性元件之間磁通量的一致性的結果。該磁性附著 的均一性可藉由該物件20與該電子裝置22的表面(其每 —者都形成一彼此適配的井)來予以促進。例如,一表面 可以是平的或具有內凹的形狀,而另一表面可具有一相匹 配的外凸形狀。以此方式,藉由緊密地配適在一起,在該 物件20與該電子裝置22內的每一對應的磁性元件之間的 分離距離可被減小至最小。表面形狀的一致性亦可藉由減 小或消除在嚙合表面26處的接縫的外觀來強化該物件20 與該電子裝置22的整體外觀與質感。當該物件20與該電 子裝置22彼此附著在一起時,此無縫的品質可提供一單 一個體的錯覺。 除了強化整體外觀與質感之外,介於磁性元件之間分 離距離的一致性可讓該物件20與該電子裝置22之間的附 著力均勻地沿著該嚙合表面26»以此方式,該嚙合力量 可被均勻地分布於嚙合表面26上以防止會對該物件20與 該電子裝置22間的嚙合的整體完整性產生不利影響的皺 曲(buckling) '脆弱點等等產生。 圖3A及3B是一藉由磁性附著系統34與對應的附著 系統36而被可釋開地附著至一電子裝置32的物件30的 -16- M430792 簡化立體圖。應指出的是,此特定的實施例與示於圖 2A’ 2B中的實施例類似’但不问處在於,之前設置在側 壁的磁性表面現在被設置在電子裝置32的一個面上及非 必要地在該物件30的一對立面上。例如,在—包括顯示 裝置的電子裝置的例子中,該磁性附著系統34的磁性元 件可被嵌埋在該顯示器表面後方。 圖3B顯示彼此磁性地附著以形成合作系統38的該物 件30與該電子裝置32作爲該合作系統38的一部分,該 電子裝置32及物件30可彼此合作以提供該物件30或該 電子裝置32分別無法提供的特徵構造。例如,物件30可 以是一外蓋的形式,其可提供防護的特徵構造。在一實施 例中,保護蓋可在該電子裝置被運送或儲存的期間被用來 支撐並保護該子裝置32(如,覆蓋該顯示器表面)。因爲該 等磁性附著系統3 4及3 6之間的磁性附著的可釋開的本質 的關係,所以物件30可在要使用該電子裝置32的時候被 輕易地取下及後續在需要的時候被重新附著。 該等磁性元件的設置可以是,只有該電子裝置32內 的某些磁性敏感元件會受到該等被嵌埋的磁性元件所產生 的磁場影響。例如,一霍耳效應感測器可被用來藉由使用 位在該物件30內的磁性元件產生的磁場來偵測該物件30 是否被磁性地附著至該電子裝置32並覆蓋顯示器的所有 部分或一部分。在另一方面,在該電子裝置32內的一磁 性敏感元件(譬如,一依賴外部磁場(如,地球提供的磁場) 的羅盤)必不能受到該等被嵌埋的磁性元件產生的磁場線 -17- M430792 不當的影響。因此,該等磁性元件可限制在該電子裝置 32內遠離該等磁性敏感元件(如,羅盤)的位置處。 圖4A及4C是一藉由磁性系統44被可釋開地附著至 一電子裝置42的物件40的簡化立體圖。此實射例與圖 2A,2B及圖3 A,3B類似之處在於,該磁性系統44可包 括多個可磁性地吸引的元件及在於該物件40與該電子裝 置42大體上對應於先前各圖式中提到的物件及電子裝 置。例如,一組可磁性地吸引的磁性元件44a可相對於該 物件40與該電子裝置42的一側予以設置,而一第二組可 磁性地吸引的磁性元件44b可相對於該物件40與該電子 裝置42的一面予以設置。如圖4B所示,合作系統46可 藉由將該物件40與該電子裝置42設置成彼此緊鄰來形 成,致使除了位在電子裝置42與物件40的面上的磁性元 件之外,位在該物件40與該電子裝置42的側邊上的磁性 元件4心亦彼此磁性地相吸。在側邊及面上所產生的整體 磁吸力足以將該物件40與該電子裝置42保持在匹配嚙合 以形成該合作系統46。 在一實施例中,如圖4C所示,該合作系統46係以打 開的組態被顯示,其中物件40被用作爲該電子裝置42的 —可打開及閉合的外蓋。亦即,物件40係如該電子裝置 42的保護蓋般地作用。在此實施例中,物件40可包括黏 結件48其沿著該電子裝置42的側邊附著及摺片50其附 著至該電子裝置42的正面且更明確地附著至頂面52。頂 面52可對應於一顯示器。在一實施方式中,摺片50可相 -18- M430792 對於該黏結件48運動。該運動可廣泛地變化。在一例子 中,摺片50可相對於該黏結件48樞轉。該樞轉可廣泛地 變化。在一例子中,該樞轉可藉由一鉸鏈機構來實施。在 另一例子中,該樞轉可藉由一摺疊來實施。再者,該摺片 可以是堅硬的、半堅硬的或可撓曲的。以此方式,物件 40可形成一打開的組態,即該摺片50被放置在遠離該電 子裝置42(顯示器52可被看到),與一閉合的組態,即摺 片50被放置成與該電子裝置42相鄰(顯示器52被覆蓋, 就如圖4B所示的閉合狀態)。 在一實施例中,黏結件48只位在一側上,而摺片50 只位在頂面52。在此組態中,該電子裝置42的其它表面 都被外露。因此,在該物件被附著於該電子裝置上的同 時,該電子裝置之美可被展現出來。又,此組態可提供更 佳的I/O存取及與功能有關的連接性(如,按扭、連接器 等等)。 雖然該等磁性元件的目的是類似的,即,將物件附著 至電子裝置,但應被理解的是,這些機構可廣泛地變化。 在一些例子中,磁場可被不同地建構。舉例而言,該側邊 安裝式的磁性表面可提供一第一磁力及該面向正面的磁性 表面可提供一不同於該第一磁力的第二磁力。這一部分是 因爲不同的固持要求以及不同的表面積,即可用空間,其 對於該電子裝置的內部構件的影響。在一例子中,該側邊 安裝式的磁性表面提供一較大的固持力量來將該物件固定 至該電子裝置,即其爲主要的固定力量,而該面向正面的 -19- M430792 磁性表面則提供輔助的固定力量。 在一例子中,該摺片50包括多個區段,這些區段是 半堅硬式且可相對於彼此彎折,使得該摺片是可運動的且 是可撓曲的。在一實施例中,該摺片50可被摺疊成一或 多種不同的組態,且在一些例子中,可使用一類似上文所 描述的磁性系統被維持在這些組態。這些及其它實施例將 在下文中予以更詳細的描述。又,應被理解的是,該等被 描述的實施例,並不侷限於外蓋且其它的組態亦可被使 用,其包括被用作爲一懸掛設備的配件裝置、用於該電子 裝置的支撐機構以改善該顯示裝置的觀看,及用作爲該顯 示器的勝控部分的輸入觸碰事件的支撐機構等等。 該電子裝置與該物件可以有許多種形式。對於此討論 的其餘部分而言,該電子裝置係以手持的可攜式運算裝置 爲例加以描述。因此,圖5顯示依據被描述的實施例的電 子裝置100的頂視立體圖。該電子裝置100可處理資料, 更明確地爲媒體資料,譬如像是音訊、視訊、影像等等》 舉例而言,該電子裝置100大體上對應於一種可作爲智慧 手機、音樂播放器、遊戲機、視覺播放器(visual player)、個人數位助理(PDA)、平板電腦及類此者的裝 置。電子裝置100亦可以是手持的。關於手持,該電子裝 置100可用一手握持同時用另一手操作(即,無需一參考 表面,如桌面)。因此,該電子裝置100可被握持於一手 之中,同時操作輸入指令可由另一手來提供。該等操作輸 入指令可包括操作音量開關、保留開關(hold switch)、或 -20- M430792 提供輸入至一觸敏感表面’譬如—觸碰敏感顯示器或一觸 碰面板。 • 該電子裝置100可包括外殼102。在一些實施例中’ . 外殼102可以是一由各種材料,譬如像是塑膠或非磁性金 屬,以锻造、模製或其它方式形成爲所想要的形狀的單件 式外殼。在該電子裝置100具有一金屬外殼並包含以射頻 (RF)爲基礎的功能的例子中,該外殼102的一部分可包括 φ 能夠讓射頻穿透的材料,譬如像是陶瓷或塑膠。外殼102 可被建構來將許多內部構件包圍起來。例如’外殼102可 包圍且支撐各式結構及電子構件(包括積體電路晶片)以提 供用於該電子裝置100的運算操作。該等積體電路可以是 晶片、晶片組、或模組的形式,這些形式的任何一者都可 被表面安裝至一印刷電路板、或PCB、或其它支撐結構 上》例如,一主要邏輯板(MLB)可具有積體電路安裝其 上,其至少可包括一微處理器、半導體記憶體(譬如, φ FLASH)、及各式支援電路等等。外殻102可包括用來放 入內部構件的開口 1 04且在有必要時可被作成能夠容納用 來呈現視覺內容的顯示器組件的大小,該顯示器組件被防 護層1 06覆蓋及保護。在一些例子中,該顯示器組件可以 是允許觸覺輸入的觸碰敏感的顯示器組件,該觸覺輸入可 被用來提供控制訊號至該電子裝置100。在一些例子中, 該顯示器組件可以是一大型顯著的顯示區域,其佔據了該 電子裝置的正面的大部分面積。 電子裝置100可包括一磁性附著系統,其可必用來將 -21 - M430792 該電子裝置100磁性地附著於至少一被適當地建構的其它 物件上。該磁性附著系統可包括多個分布於外殼102內且 在一些例子中連接至外殼102的磁性附著特徵構造。例 如,該磁性附著系統可包括位在該電子裝置100的不同側 的第一磁性附著特徵構造108及第二磁性附著特徵構造 110。詳言之,該第一磁性附著特徵構造108可被設置在 緊鄰外殼102的側壁102a處。該第二磁性附著特徵構造 1 10可被設置在一靠近該外殼102的側壁102b的開口 104 內。在電子裝置100包括一顯示器其具有一實質地塡滿該 開口 104的覆蓋玻璃的實施例中,該第二磁性附著特徵構 造110可被設置在該覆蓋玻璃底下。 將該第一磁性附著特徵構造108設置在該側壁102a 可方便將該第一磁性附著特徵構造108用來把該電子裝置 100磁性地附著另一被適當地建構的物件,譬如另一電子 裝置或一配件裝置。因此,在沒有喪失其一般性之下,該 第一磁性附著特徵構造108將在下文中被稱爲裝置附著特 徵構造108。 在另一方面,設置該第二磁性附著特徵構造110可方 便用該第二磁性附著特徵構造110來固定另一裝置的態樣 (aspects),該另一裝置係藉由該裝置附著特徵構造108而 被附著至該電子裝置100。以此方式,該另一裝置與該電 子裝置100之間的整體附著可以比只透過該第一附著特徵 構造108的附著更加穩固。因此,在沒有喪失其一般性之 下,該第二磁性附著特徵構造110將在下文中被稱爲固定 -22- M430792 附著特徵構造110。 雖然沒有被明確地顯示,但應被理解的是’該磁性附 著系統的多個磁性附著特徵構造可被設置在該外殼1 02的 任何適當的位置。例如,該等磁性附著特徵構造可被設置 在外殼102的內部的底面或沿著外殼102的側邊l〇2c及 1 20d設置。 如圖6所示,該裝置附著特徵構造108與該固定附著 特徵構造110每一者都包括一或多個磁性元件。在一例子 中,該裝置附著特徵構造108可以是多個可以彼此磁性地 相互作用以提供磁場1 1 2的磁性元件(只有一部分被示 出換言之,該磁場1 12的特性(形狀、場強度等等)係 根據每一磁性元件所產生的磁場的相互作用而定。以此方 式,磁場112的特性可以很簡單地藉由安排每一磁性元件 的特性(如,實體佈局、相對大下、及構成磁極)來予以改 變。例如,每一磁性元件可具有不同大下且可沿著一軸線 予以設置。以此方式,該等磁性元件每一磁性元件的磁特 性可共同作用,用以建立磁場1 1 2的整體特性。 在一些例子中,該磁場112被使用於該裝置附著特徵 構造108與另一裝置之間的磁性附著上的部分可藉由一分 磁器(未示出)來予以強化。該分磁器可用磁活性材料,譬 如鋼或鐵,來製造且可被放置在一個會造成原本被引導遠 離該附著區的磁場線至少部分地被重新導向該附著區的位 置。該等被重新導向的磁場線可具有提高該附著區內的平 均磁通量密度的效果。 -23- M430792 該裝置附著特徵構造108可在一作用狀態(active state)以及在一不作用的狀態(inactive state)下操作。在該 不作用的狀態下,磁通量密度B112可等於或大於在該外 殼102的內表面內部的磁通量密度低限値Bthresh<)ld,但在 該外殻102的內表面外部則不適用。換言之,在外殼102 的外表面處的磁場 Π2的磁通量密度B112小於磁通量密 度低限値BthreSh〇id。該磁通量密度低限値Bthresh()ld代表 —磁通量數値,當低於數値時磁性敏感裝置(譬如,信用 卡上的磁條)可保持實質不受影響。此外,一磁性活化材 料(譬如,鋼)存在於該電子裝置1〇〇外的一區域內本身將 不會觸發該裝置附著特徵構造108從該不作用的狀態轉變 至該作用狀態。 如上文中提到的,當該裝置附著特徵構造108是不作 用時,在該外殼102的側邊102a的外表面處的磁場112 的磁通量密度B112小於磁通量密度低限値Bthresht)ld。詳 言之,關於該裝置附著特徵構造108,磁通量密度B112可 如一離該等磁性元件的距離 X的函數般地變化(即, B = B112(x))。因此,當該裝置附著特徵構造112是在不作 用狀態時,B112(X)可滿足式(1)。W face. According to an embodiment, the attachment feature configurations may comprise magnetic elements. The magnetic elements can be constructed to assist in positioning the article 10 relative to the electronic device 12 in a matched configuration. The magnetic elements can further assist in securing the article 10 and the electronic device 12 to a mating engagement. It should be noted that the engagement of the article 10 with the electronic device 12 can be reversed by applying an appropriate release force that allows the object 10 to be separated from the electronic device 12 back to the individual object state. However, the magnetic elements can allow the article 10 and the electronic device 12 to subsequently regain the mating engagement without the need for any type of fastener, mechanical or other type of fastener. In this manner, the magnetic elements provide a repeatable and consistent engagement between the article 10 and the electronic device 12. The article 10 and the electronic device 12 can further include members 16 and 18, respectively. Components 16 and 18 are typically associated with the article 10 with the electronic device 12 and may, for example, be mechanical or structural members used to provide support, or they may be operable to provide a particular set of operations/functions-13 - M430792 Sexual/functional components. Such components may be exclusive to their respective devices or they may be constructed for use with aspects (e.g., wired or wireless coupling) of corresponding objects or devices. Examples of structural members may include frames, walls, fasteners, reinforcements, kinematics (hinge), and the like. Examples of operational components include handling, memory, battery packs, antennas, circuits, sensors, displays, inputs, and the like. Depending on the desired configuration, the components may be external (e.g., exposed on the surface) and/or internal (e.g., embedded within the housing). 2A and 2B are simplified perspective views of an article 20 in accordance with a described embodiment, the article being releasably attached to electronic device 22 via a magnetic attachment system. The object 20 and the electronic device 22 generally correspond to the object and electronic device described with reference to FIG. In one embodiment, the magnetic attachment system can be embodied as a magnetic surface 24 (indicated by dotted lines and shading), more specifically as a magnetic surface 24 on the side of the electronic device 22. The magnetic surface 24 can provide a magnetic field that can cooperate with the corresponding attachment feature configuration when placed in close proximity to a corresponding attachment feature within the article 20. The magnetic field establishes a net magnetic attraction that pulls the article 20 and the electronic device 22 together into a mating engagement along the engagement surface 26 as shown in Figure 2B. In other words, the magnetic field provided by the magnetic surface 24 can have characteristics that allow the net magnetic attraction between the article 20 and the electronic device 22 to be substantially perpendicular to the engagement surface 26. Moreover, the magnetic field allows the net magnetic attraction between the article 20 and the electronic device 22 to be uniformly applied to the engagement surface 26. In order to release the article 20 and the electronic device 22, a release force can be applied to the two bonded articles by -14-M430792 to overcome the net magnetic attraction provided by the magnetic attachment system. * It should be understood that although only one side wall is shown, in some examples, the combination of different side walls and side walls may be used depending on the needs of the attachment interface. It should be noted that the use of magnetic attachments eliminates the need for mechanical attachments such as fasteners. Moreover, without the mechanical attachment member and the uniformity of the overall magnetic attraction, the object 20 and the surface 0 of the electronic device 22 are not damaged. This contributes to the appearance of the same oneness, in the same whole The object 20 and the electronic device 22 appear to be a single intact individual. The uniformity in appearance improves the overall aesthetic appearance of both the article 20 and the electronic device 22. In one embodiment, a magnetic surface can be created by embedding the magnetically attractable element in the form of an attachment feature in the electronic component 22 and/or the article 20. That is, the magnetically attractable elements can be disposed within the article 20 and the electronic device 22, such as within the housing of the electronic device φ 22. In this configuration, the housing can be made of a non-magnetic material such as a plastic or non-ferrous metal such as aluminum. In this way, a magnetic line can be constructed to penetrate the wall of the outer casing. The attachment features are constructed without damaging the physical appearance of the object 20 and the outer surface of the electronic device 22. The magnetically attractable elements in the article 20 and the electronic device 22 can be configured to generate magnetic fields that can cooperate with one another to create a magnetic field that can be attached to the electronic device 22 for mating engagement. The configuration of the suction. The magnetic attraction is constructed to produce a magnetic attraction orthogonal to the engagement surface 26 between the article 20 and the electronic device 22. -15- M430792 The magnetic attraction between the object 20 and the corresponding magnetic element in the electronic device 22 can also be uniformly applied along the engagement surface 26. The uniformity of the overall magnetic attraction along the engagement surface 26 can be a result of the uniformity of the separation distance between the object 20 and the corresponding magnetic element within the electronic device 22. The uniformity may also be a result of the consistency of the magnetic flux between the object 20 and the corresponding magnetic element within the electronic device 22. The uniformity of the magnetic attachment can be facilitated by the object 20 and the surface of the electronic device 22, each of which forms a well that fits each other. For example, one surface may be flat or have a concave shape, and the other surface may have a matching convex shape. In this manner, by closely fitting together, the separation distance between the article 20 and each corresponding magnetic element within the electronic device 22 can be minimized. The uniformity of the surface shape can also enhance the overall appearance and texture of the article 20 and the electronic device 22 by reducing or eliminating the appearance of the seam at the engagement surface 26. This seamless quality provides the illusion of a single body when the object 20 and the electronic device 22 are attached to each other. In addition to enhancing the overall appearance and texture, the uniformity of the separation distance between the magnetic elements allows the adhesion between the article 20 and the electronic device 22 to be uniformly along the engagement surface 26» in this manner, the engagement The force can be evenly distributed over the engagement surface 26 to prevent buckling 'vulnerability points, etc., which can adversely affect the overall integrity of the engagement between the article 20 and the electronic device 22. 3A and 3B are simplified perspective views of a -16-M430792 of an article 30 releasably attached to an electronic device 32 by a magnetic attachment system 34 and a corresponding attachment system 36. It should be noted that this particular embodiment is similar to the embodiment shown in Figures 2A' 2B 'but no matter where the magnetic surface previously placed on the side wall is now placed on one side of the electronic device 32 and is not necessary Ground on a pair of façades of the article 30. For example, in an example of an electronic device that includes a display device, the magnetic components of the magnetic attachment system 34 can be embedded behind the display surface. 3B shows the article 30 magnetically attached to each other to form a cooperative system 38 and the electronic device 32 as part of the cooperative system 38, the electronic device 32 and the article 30 can cooperate with each other to provide the article 30 or the electronic device 32 respectively Feature constructs that are not available. For example, article 30 can be in the form of an outer cover that provides a protective feature. In one embodiment, the protective cover can be used to support and protect the sub-device 32 (e.g., to cover the display surface) during transport or storage of the electronic device. Because of the releasable nature of the magnetic attachment between the magnetic attachment systems 34 and 36, the article 30 can be easily removed when the electronic device 32 is to be used and subsequently subsequently Reattach. The magnetic elements may be arranged such that only certain magnetically sensitive elements within the electronic device 32 are affected by the magnetic fields generated by the embedded magnetic elements. For example, a Hall effect sensor can be used to detect whether the object 30 is magnetically attached to the electronic device 32 and covers all portions of the display by using a magnetic field generated by a magnetic element located within the object 30. Or part of it. In another aspect, a magnetic sensitive component within the electronic device 32 (e.g., a compass that relies on an external magnetic field (e.g., a magnetic field provided by the earth) must not be subjected to the magnetic field lines generated by the embedded magnetic components - 17- M430792 Improper influence. Thus, the magnetic elements can be confined within the electronic device 32 away from the locations of the magnetic sensing elements (e.g., compasses). 4A and 4C are simplified perspective views of an article 40 releasably attached to an electronic device 42 by a magnetic system 44. This embodiment is similar to FIGS. 2A, 2B and 3A, 3B in that the magnetic system 44 can include a plurality of magnetically attractable elements and in that the object 40 and the electronic device 42 generally correspond to previous ones. The objects and electronic devices mentioned in the drawings. For example, a set of magnetically attractable magnetic elements 44a can be disposed relative to the object 40 and one side of the electronic device 42, and a second set of magnetically attractable magnetic elements 44b can be associated with the object 40 One side of the electronic device 42 is provided. As shown in FIG. 4B, the cooperation system 46 can be formed by placing the article 40 and the electronic device 42 in close proximity to each other, so that in addition to the magnetic components located on the faces of the electronic device 42 and the object 40, The object 40 and the core of the magnetic element 4 on the side of the electronic device 42 also magnetically attract each other. The overall magnetic attraction generated on the sides and faces is sufficient to maintain the mating engagement of the article 40 with the electronic device 42 to form the cooperating system 46. In one embodiment, as shown in Figure 4C, the cooperative system 46 is shown in an open configuration in which the article 40 is used as an openable and closable cover for the electronic device 42. That is, the object 40 functions like a protective cover of the electronic device 42. In this embodiment, the article 40 can include an adhesive member 48 that is attached along the sides of the electronic device 42 and that is attached to the front side of the electronic device 42 and more specifically attached to the top surface 52. Top surface 52 can correspond to a display. In one embodiment, the flaps 50 are movable relative to the bond member -18-M430792. This movement can vary widely. In one example, the flap 50 is pivotable relative to the bond 48. This pivoting can vary widely. In an example, the pivoting can be implemented by a hinge mechanism. In another example, the pivoting can be implemented by a fold. Again, the flaps can be rigid, semi-rigid or flexible. In this manner, the article 40 can be formed in an open configuration in which the flap 50 is placed away from the electronic device 42 (the display 52 can be seen), and with a closed configuration, that is, the flap 50 is placed Adjacent to the electronic device 42 (the display 52 is covered, as shown in the closed state of Figure 4B). In one embodiment, the bond 48 is only on one side and the flap 50 is only on the top surface 52. In this configuration, the other surfaces of the electronic device 42 are exposed. Therefore, the beauty of the electronic device can be exhibited while the object is attached to the electronic device. Again, this configuration provides better I/O access and feature-related connectivity (eg, buttons, connectors, etc.). While the purpose of the magnetic elements is similar, i.e., attaching the items to the electronic device, it should be understood that these mechanisms can vary widely. In some examples, the magnetic fields can be constructed differently. For example, the side-mounted magnetic surface provides a first magnetic force and the front facing magnetic surface provides a second magnetic force different from the first magnetic force. This is due in part to the different retention requirements and the different surface area, the space available for the internal components of the electronic device. In one example, the side-mounted magnetic surface provides a greater holding force to secure the article to the electronic device, ie, it is the primary fixed force, and the front facing -19-M430792 magnetic surface is Provides an auxiliary fixed force. In one example, the flap 50 includes a plurality of sections that are semi-rigid and bendable relative to each other such that the flap is movable and flexible. In an embodiment, the flaps 50 can be folded into one or more different configurations, and in some examples, a magnetic system similar to that described above can be maintained in these configurations. These and other embodiments are described in more detail below. Moreover, it should be understood that the described embodiments are not limited to the outer cover and other configurations may be used, including accessory devices that are used as a suspension device for the electronic device. The support mechanism is for improving the viewing of the display device, and for supporting the input touch event as the winning portion of the display, and the like. The electronic device and the article can take many forms. For the remainder of this discussion, the electronic device is described as an example of a handheld portable computing device. Thus, Figure 5 shows a top perspective view of an electronic device 100 in accordance with the described embodiment. The electronic device 100 can process data, more specifically media data, such as audio, video, video, etc., for example, the electronic device 100 generally corresponds to a smart phone, a music player, a game machine. , visual player, personal digital assistant (PDA), tablet, and devices like this. The electronic device 100 can also be handheld. With regard to hand-held, the electronic device 100 can be held in one hand while being operated with the other hand (i.e., without a reference surface, such as a table top). Therefore, the electronic device 100 can be held in one hand while the operation input command can be provided by the other hand. Such operational input commands may include operating a volume switch, a hold switch, or a -20-M430792 providing input to a touch sensitive surface, such as a touch sensitive display or a touch panel. • The electronic device 100 can include a housing 102. In some embodiments, the outer casing 102 can be a one-piece outer casing that is forged, molded, or otherwise formed into a desired shape from a variety of materials, such as plastic or non-magnetic metals. In the case where the electronic device 100 has a metal casing and includes a radio frequency (RF) based function, a portion of the casing 102 may include φ a material that allows radio frequency penetration, such as, for example, ceramic or plastic. The outer casing 102 can be constructed to enclose many internal components. For example, the housing 102 can enclose and support various structures and electronic components (including integrated circuit wafers) to provide operational operations for the electronic device 100. The integrated circuits can be in the form of a wafer, a wafer set, or a module, any of which can be surface mounted to a printed circuit board, or PCB, or other support structure. For example, a primary logic board The (MLB) may have an integrated circuit mounted thereon, which may include at least a microprocessor, a semiconductor memory (e.g., φ FLASH), various support circuits, and the like. The housing 102 can include an opening 104 for placement into the interior member and can be sized to accommodate a display assembly for presenting visual content if necessary, the display assembly being covered and protected by the protective layer 106. In some examples, the display component can be a touch sensitive display component that allows for tactile input that can be used to provide control signals to the electronic device 100. In some examples, the display assembly can be a large, significant display area that occupies most of the area of the front of the electronic device. The electronic device 100 can include a magnetic attachment system that can be used to magnetically attach the -21 - M430792 electronic device 100 to at least one other item that is properly constructed. The magnetic attachment system can include a plurality of magnetic attachment features that are distributed within the outer casing 102 and, in some examples, to the outer casing 102. For example, the magnetic attachment system can include a first magnetic attachment feature 108 and a second magnetic attachment feature 110 positioned on different sides of the electronic device 100. In particular, the first magnetic attachment feature 108 can be disposed adjacent the sidewall 102a of the housing 102. The second magnetic attachment feature 1 10 can be disposed within an opening 104 adjacent the sidewall 102b of the outer casing 102. In embodiments where the electronic device 100 includes a display having a cover glass that substantially fills the opening 104, the second magnetic attachment feature 110 can be disposed under the cover glass. Positioning the first magnetic attachment feature 108 on the sidewall 102a facilitates the use of the first magnetic attachment feature 108 to magnetically attach the electronic device 100 to another suitably constructed article, such as another electronic device or An accessory device. Thus, the first magnetic attachment feature 108 will be referred to hereinafter as the device attachment feature 108 without losing its generality. In another aspect, providing the second magnetic attachment feature 110 can facilitate the use of the second magnetic attachment feature 110 to secure an aspect of another device by which the device is attached to the feature 108. It is attached to the electronic device 100. In this manner, the overall attachment between the other device and the electronic device 100 can be more robust than the attachment only through the first attachment feature 108. Thus, the second magnetic attachment feature 110 will be referred to hereinafter as the fixed -22-M430792 attachment feature 110 without losing its generality. Although not explicitly shown, it should be understood that the plurality of magnetic attachment features of the magnetic attachment system can be disposed at any suitable location of the housing 102. For example, the magnetic attachment features can be disposed on the bottom surface of the interior of the outer casing 102 or along the sides l2c and 120d of the outer casing 102. As shown in Figure 6, the device attachment feature 108 and the fixed attachment feature 110 each include one or more magnetic elements. In one example, the device attachment feature 108 can be a plurality of magnetic elements that can magnetically interact with each other to provide a magnetic field 1 1 2 (only a portion is shown, in other words, the characteristics of the magnetic field 12 (shape, field strength, etc.) Depending on the interaction of the magnetic field generated by each magnetic element. In this way, the characteristics of the magnetic field 112 can be simply by arranging the characteristics of each magnetic element (eg, physical layout, relatively large, and The magnetic poles are configured to vary. For example, each of the magnetic elements can have different heights and can be disposed along an axis. In this manner, the magnetic properties of each of the magnetic elements can interact to establish a magnetic field. The overall characteristics of 1 1 2. In some examples, the portion of the magnetic field 112 that is used for magnetic attachment between the device attachment feature 108 and another device can be enhanced by a magnetizer (not shown). The magnetizer can be fabricated from a magnetically active material, such as steel or iron, and can be placed in a magnetic field line that would otherwise be directed away from the attachment region. Partially redirected to the location of the attachment zone. The redirected magnetic field lines may have the effect of increasing the average magnetic flux density within the attachment zone. -23- M430792 The device attachment feature 108 may be in an active state (active And operating in an inactive state. In the inactive state, the magnetic flux density B112 may be equal to or greater than a magnetic flux density lower limit 値Bthresh<)ld inside the inner surface of the outer casing 102, However, it is not applicable outside the inner surface of the outer casing 102. In other words, the magnetic flux density B112 of the magnetic field Π2 at the outer surface of the outer casing 102 is smaller than the magnetic flux density lower limit 値BthreSh〇id. The magnetic flux density is low 値Bthresh() ld represents - the number of magnetic fluxes 値, and when less than a few 値, the magnetic sensitive device (for example, the magnetic strip on the credit card) can remain substantially unaffected. In addition, the presence of a magnetically active material (e.g., steel) in an area outside the electronic device 1 itself will not trigger the device attachment feature 108 to transition from the inactive state to the active state. As mentioned above, when the device attachment feature 108 is inactive, the magnetic flux density B112 of the magnetic field 112 at the outer surface of the side 102a of the outer casing 102 is less than the magnetic flux density lower limit 値Bthresht)ld. In particular, with respect to the device attachment feature 108, the magnetic flux density B112 can be varied as a function of the distance X from the magnetic elements (i.e., B = B112(x)). Thus, when the device attachment feature 112 is in an inactive state, B112(X) may satisfy equation (1).

Bm(x = X〇 + 0 < Bthreshold, 式⑴ 其中t是外殼102在側邊102a處的厚度,及XQ是從側邊 102 a的內部到該等磁性元件的距離。當該裝置附著特徵 構造108是在不作用的狀態時,在接近該電子裝置100的 外面的區域內的任何磁通量漏損量(即,Bii2(X>X〇 + t))係 -24- M430792 小到足以讓位於該近接區域內的磁性敏感裝置受到不利的 影響的能性極低。然而,應指出的是,即使是在不作用的 , 狀態(inactive state),磁場112可具有一滿足式(1)的磁通 . 量數値B112(X = x〇 + t),且大到足以與被放置成與其極爲接 近的另一裝置的磁場相互作用。以此方式,即使是式(1) 被滿足,在該另一裝置中被適當地建構的磁性附著特徵構 造可被用來激活(activate)該裝置附著特徵構造108。 座 磁場112的特性至少包括場強度、磁極、等等。磁場Bm (x = X 〇 + 0 < Bthreshold, where (t) is the thickness of the outer casing 102 at the side 102a, and XQ is the distance from the interior of the side 102 a to the magnetic elements. When the configuration 108 is in an inactive state, any amount of magnetic flux leakage (i.e., Bii2(X>X〇+t)) in the region close to the outside of the electronic device 100 is small enough to give way. The ability of the magnetically sensitive device in the proximity region to be adversely affected is extremely low. However, it should be noted that the magnetic field 112 may have a satisfying equation (1) even in an inactive state. Magnetic flux. The quantity 値B112 (X = x〇+ t) is large enough to interact with the magnetic field of another device placed in close proximity to it. In this way, even if equation (1) is satisfied, A properly constructed magnetic attachment feature in the other device can be used to activate the device attachment feature 108. The characteristics of the seating magnetic field 112 include at least field strength, magnetic poles, and the like.

W 112的特性係根據包括在該裝置附著特徵構造108內的每 一磁性元件的磁場的組合。該等被組合的磁場可形成該疊 置的磁場112»例如,該等磁性元件可以一種該等個別的 磁場的組合產生具有所想要的磁場特性(如,場強度)的磁 場112的方式予以配置。例如,該等磁性元件的一種配置 的組合可產生具有特性(如,磁極及強度)的磁場1 1 2,該 等特性大部分係對稱於一特定的軸線(譬如,一幾何中心 • 線)。 在另一方面,該等磁性元件的配置方式可讓該等磁性 元件的磁場的組合所產生的磁場1 1 2具有至少一種特性係 不對稱於該中心線。例如,在該中心線的一側上的磁性元 件被設置成其北磁極係朝向上而在該中心線的另一側上的 ~對應磁性元件則被設置成其南磁極係朝向上》因此,磁 場112的磁特性可以_種適當的方式予以調整以提供所想 要的匹配嚙合。例如,磁場112的磁特性可藉由將該等磁 性元件以一種可讓磁場112與另一磁場(例如,來自另一 -25- M430792 磁性附著系統)合作性地相互作用的方式配置來予以改 變。兩個磁場間的合作性相互作用可產生讓這兩個物件彼 此以一種明確的、精確的、且可重複的方式磁性地附著的 結果。 磁場112的特性可以是穩定的。穩定係指該磁場的特 性可實質未變地保持一段持久的時間。因此,一穩定版本 的磁場112可藉由使用磁性特徵在一段持久的時間內係實 質上不變(或幾近不變)或至少在一個構件內的任何改變可 被另一構件內之相對應的改變所抵銷的磁性元件來產生。 該等磁性元件可以一種相對於於其它磁性元件爲固定的或 至少實質固定的組態來予以實體地配置。例如,該等磁性 元件每一者可具有固定的尺寸及相對於彼此以特定的順序 設置的磁極用以提供具有所想要的特性(形狀、強度、磁 極等等)的磁場112。因此,根據該等磁性元件的特性及 本質,磁場112的形狀可在一段持久的期間(譬如,該電 子裝置1〇〇被預期的操作壽命期間)維持實質上未改變。 然而,在一些實施例中,磁場112的特性可藉由變更 該等磁性元件的至少一者的磁特性或其它物力特性來予以 改變。當至少一磁性元件具有可被變更的磁特性(如,磁 極或場強度)時,所產生的磁場亦可被變更。因此,在一 些實施例中,該等磁性元件的至少一者可被特徵化 (characterized)爲具有動態磁特性。動態(dynamic)係指至 少一種磁特性,如磁極,可被變更。以此方式,所得到的 磁場的磁場特性亦可改變。該所得到的磁場接著可改變該 -26- M430792 磁場112的磁特性,其接著可改變該磁性附著系統讓該等 物件彼此磁性地附著的方式(如,對準、方位、定心等 * 等)。一電磁鐵是該磁性元件的一個例子,其磁特性可如 . 所需地予以變更。其它的例子包括一注入磁性摻雜物 (如,磁鐵礦)之可展延的非磁性基材。以此方式,該可展 延的基材可被形成爲能夠影響該磁性摻雜材料所產生的磁 場的本質的實體形狀。 ^ 現翻到該磁性附著系統的其它面向,該固定附著特徵 構造110可包括一或多個磁性元件116。當多個磁性元件 被使用時,該等磁性元件116的配置可廣泛地變化且可與 另一裝置上的一對應的特徵構造磁性地相互作用。在一實 施例中,與固定附著特徵構造110相關連的該等磁性元件 116可協助將另一裝置的至少一部分固定,該另一裝置係 藉由裝置附著特徵構造1〇8而被附著至該電子裝置100。 該等磁性元件116的至少一些部分可具有固定的尺寸 φ 及極性(如,一簡單的桿狀磁鐵之類者),而該等磁性元件 116的其它部分可具有可改變的磁特性(譬如,電磁鐵), 該等磁性元件的另外其它部分可被作成可提供特定的磁特 性的形狀。例如,該等磁性元件116的至少一者可被設置 在與一包括在另一裝置中磁性回應電路相互作用的位置及 (如果有必要的話)被作成與該磁性回應電路相互作用的形 狀。因此,該,磁性回應電路可對於該固定附著特徵構造 110的一特定的磁性元件的存在(或不存在)作出回應。該 磁性回應電路的一個例子係關於該霍耳效應感測器11 8被 -27- M430792 描述於上文中。 應指出的是,該等磁性元件116所產生的磁場不應延 伸的太遠,致使該電子裝置1〇〇內的磁性敏感電路(譬 如,霍耳效應感測器1 1 8)受到不利的影響β這是特別重 要的,因爲該磁場通常沒有被包含在該外殼102內,因爲 該磁場的至少一部分必需延伸於ζ方向上,用以與其它裝 置的磁性作用部分相互作用。因此,在{X,y}內的磁場其 延伸程度必需被限制以避開像是霍耳效應感測器1 1 8及羅 盤120的磁性敏感電路。 在特定的實施方式中,該裝置附著特徵構造108的磁 性元件可被聚集成不同磁區。以此方式,來自該等磁區的 磁場可疊加以形成磁場1 1 2。該等磁區可包括不同的磁性 元件,其可被配置成由磁性元件126及128所代表的組 群。藉由將磁性元件聚集成分開的磁區,該磁性附著系統 提供具有所想要的特性的磁場的能力可被實質地提高。磁 性元件1 26及1 28可彼此相互作用以形成磁場1 1 2。在該 實施例中,該相互作用可以是磁性元件126與128的每一 者的磁特性的組合形式。在某些例子中,磁性元件1 26及 128的配置可以是彼此相關聯,用以提供具有所想要的特 性的.磁場1 12。例如,磁性元件126及128係以一種彼此 相關的方式予以配置,使得磁場112相關於該裝置附著特 徵構造108的水平中心線是不對稱的(或對稱的)。另一實 施例中,磁場112可相關於該裝置附著特徵構造108的垂 直中心線是不對稱的(或對稱的)。在又另—實施例中,磁 -28- M430792 場112可以是水平與垂直都不對稱(或對稱)。 圖7A顯示該電子裝置1〇〇緊鄰具有磁性附著特徵構 • 造202的物件200 »該物件200的磁性附著特徵構造202 . 可包括磁性元件,每一磁性元件產生一個別的磁場,該等 磁場可相互作用以聚集地形成一成果磁場(resulting magnetic field)。該成果磁場可具有能夠與該電子裝置 1〇〇的磁場112相互作用的磁特性(譬如,場強度及形 φ 狀),用以將該電子裝置100與該物件200以一種明確 的、精確的且可重複的方式在沒有機械式緊固件且無需外 部協助下附著在一起。應指出的是,磁場208約爲2500 高斯(Gauss),而當該裝置附著特徵構造108是在不作用 狀態時該磁場1 12則是約1 400高斯。 物件200可以是包括附件、周邊設備、電子裝置、或 類此者在內的許多形式。在一實施例中,物件200的形式 可以是該電子裝置100之類者。因此,電子裝置100與電 φ 子裝置200可使用該裝置附著特徵構造108及磁性附著特 徵構造202彼此磁性地附著在一起以形成一合作的電子系 統。該合作的電子系統可以是一種電子裝置100內的電子 元件與電子裝置200內的對應電子元件彼此合作以實施這 兩個電子裝置分開來無法獨立實施的功能的電子系統。在 —實施例中,資訊可被傳送於電子裝置100與200之間。 詳言之,磁性附著特徵構造202可至少包括磁性元件 204及206,它們每一者都可產生磁場能夠彼此相互作用 的磁場以提供磁場208(只有一部分被示出)》磁場208的 -29- M430792 特性係根據該等磁性元件204及2 06每一者的相互作用。 以此方式,磁場208可具有根據磁性元件204及206的每 一者的實體佈局、相對尺寸、及構成磁極的磁特性。例 如,磁性元件204及206可沿著中心線予以設置且具有可 疊置的磁性以提供具有所想要的特性的磁場208。物件 200的磁場208的磁通量密度B2Q8可如一離該等磁性元件 204及2 06的距離的函數般地改變(即,B = B2G8(x))。 當物件200的形式是一電子裝置時,譬如電子裝置 100,則磁通量密度B2Q8滿足式(1)。然而,當物件200的 形式是一配件裝置時,則與電子裝置1〇〇之滿足式(1)的 磁通量密度B112不同地,配件裝置200的磁通量密度 B 2 0 8可滿足式(2)。 B2O8 (X = Xl + S) > Bthreshold 式⑵ 其中S爲外殻212在側邊212a的厚度,及X|爲內部分離 距離。以此方式,配件裝置2 00可與電子裝置100磁性地 相互作用,比其它方式更進一步地從該電子裝置1〇〇被去 除。因此,該配件裝置200可被設置在靠近但不必緊鄰該 電子裝置1〇〇,用以讓該電子裝置1〇〇與該物件200能夠 以一種明確的、可預測的及可重複的方式彼此磁性地吸 附。 除了磁性附著特徵構造2 02之外,該配件裝置200可 進一步包括磁性附著特徵構造216,其可被用來與固定附 著特徵構造11〇相互作用。磁性附著特徵構造216可包括 許多磁性作用構件。一些磁性元件可以是被配置來與在固 -30- M430792 定附著特徵構造110內相對應的磁性元件合作地相互作用 的形式。其它的磁性元件的本質可以是較被動的 (passive),因爲它們提供一用來與該固定附著特徵構造 110內的磁性作用元件完成一磁性電路的機構。該磁性被 動元件的一個例子爲含體的磁性材料,譬如像是鐵或鋼, 其可與一主動地提供一相關聯的磁場的磁性元件相互作 用。以此方式,該含鐵的磁性材料可與該磁場相互作用以 完成一磁性電路於該磁性附著特徵構造216內的被動元件 與該固定附著特徵構造110內的主動元件之間。 圖7B顯示該配件裝置200可被用來提供用於電子裝 置1〇〇的支援功能及服務。藉由容許一部分的磁場 208(其具有滿足式(2)的磁通量密度B2Q8)延伸進入該區域 214中,介於裝置附著特徵構造108與磁性附著特徵構造 202之間的磁吸力量Fnet可被產生,其中該淨磁吸力量 Fnet滿足式(3a)及式(3b)。The characteristics of W 112 are based on a combination of magnetic fields of each of the magnetic elements included in the device attachment feature 108. The combined magnetic fields can form the stacked magnetic field 112», for example, the magnetic elements can be generated by a combination of the individual magnetic fields to produce a magnetic field 112 having a desired magnetic field characteristic (e.g., field strength). Configuration. For example, a combination of configurations of the magnetic elements can produce a magnetic field 1 1 2 having characteristics (e.g., magnetic poles and strength) that are mostly symmetrical about a particular axis (e.g., a geometric center • line). In another aspect, the magnetic elements are arranged in such a way that the magnetic field 1 1 2 produced by the combination of the magnetic fields of the magnetic elements has at least one characteristic that is asymmetric with respect to the centerline. For example, the magnetic element on one side of the centerline is disposed such that its north magnetic pole body faces upward and the corresponding magnetic element on the other side of the center line is disposed such that its south magnetic pole system faces upward. The magnetic properties of the magnetic field 112 can be adjusted in a suitable manner to provide the desired mating engagement. For example, the magnetic properties of the magnetic field 112 can be altered by configuring the magnetic elements in a manner that allows the magnetic field 112 to cooperatively interact with another magnetic field (e.g., from another-25-M430792 magnetic attachment system). . The cooperative interaction between the two magnetic fields produces the result of magnetically attaching the two objects to each other in a clear, precise, and repeatable manner. The characteristics of the magnetic field 112 can be stable. Stabilization means that the characteristics of the magnetic field can remain substantially unchanged for a sustained period of time. Thus, a stable version of the magnetic field 112 can be substantially constant (or nearly constant) over a sustained period of time using magnetic features or at least any change within one component can be corresponding to within another component. The changes are offset by the magnetic components that are produced. The magnetic elements may be physically configured in a configuration that is fixed or at least substantially fixed relative to other magnetic elements. For example, the magnetic elements can each have a fixed size and magnetic poles disposed in a particular order relative to one another to provide a magnetic field 112 having desired characteristics (shape, strength, magnetic pole, etc.). Thus, depending on the nature and nature of the magnetic elements, the shape of the magnetic field 112 can remain substantially unchanged for a sustained period of time (e.g., during the expected operational life of the electronic device 1). However, in some embodiments, the characteristics of the magnetic field 112 can be varied by altering the magnetic or other physical properties of at least one of the magnetic elements. When at least one of the magnetic elements has a magnetic property that can be altered (e.g., magnetic pole or field strength), the generated magnetic field can also be altered. Thus, in some embodiments, at least one of the magnetic elements can be characterized as having dynamic magnetic properties. Dynamic means that at least one magnetic property, such as a magnetic pole, can be altered. In this way, the magnetic field characteristics of the resulting magnetic field can also be changed. The resulting magnetic field can then change the magnetic properties of the -26-M430792 magnetic field 112, which can then change the way the magnetic attachment system magnetically attaches the objects to each other (eg, alignment, orientation, centering, etc.*, etc. ). An electromagnet is an example of the magnetic element, and its magnetic properties can be changed as desired. Other examples include a ductile non-magnetic substrate that is implanted with a magnetic dopant (e.g., magnetite). In this manner, the extensible substrate can be formed into a solid shape capable of affecting the nature of the magnetic field produced by the magnetic doping material. ^ Turning now to other faces of the magnetic attachment system, the fixed attachment feature 110 can include one or more magnetic elements 116. When multiple magnetic elements are used, the configuration of the magnetic elements 116 can vary widely and can magnetically interact with a corresponding feature configuration on another device. In one embodiment, the magnetic elements 116 associated with the fixed attachment feature 110 can assist in securing at least a portion of another device that is attached to the device by the device attachment feature configuration 1〇8 Electronic device 100. At least some portions of the magnetic elements 116 may have a fixed dimension φ and polarity (e.g., a simple rod magnet), while other portions of the magnetic elements 116 may have modifiable magnetic properties (e.g., Electromagnets, other portions of the magnetic elements can be shaped to provide specific magnetic properties. For example, at least one of the magnetic elements 116 can be configured to interact with a magnetic response circuit at a location that interacts with a magnetic response circuit included in another device and, if necessary. Thus, the magnetic response circuit can respond to the presence (or absence) of a particular magnetic component of the fixed attachment feature configuration 110. An example of such a magnetic response circuit is described above with respect to the Hall effect sensor 181 by -27-M430792. It should be noted that the magnetic field generated by the magnetic elements 116 should not extend too far, causing the magnetic sensitive circuits (such as the Hall effect sensor 118) in the electronic device 1 to be adversely affected. This is particularly important because the magnetic field is typically not contained within the outer casing 102 because at least a portion of the magnetic field must extend in the x-direction to interact with the magnetically active portions of other devices. Therefore, the extent of the magnetic field within {X, y} must be limited to avoid magnetic sensitive circuits such as Hall effect sensor 1 18 and compass 120. In a particular embodiment, the magnetic elements of the device attachment feature 108 can be gathered into different magnetic regions. In this way, the magnetic fields from the magnetic domains can be superimposed to form a magnetic field 1 1 2 . The magnetic regions can include different magnetic elements that can be configured as a group represented by magnetic elements 126 and 128. By concentrating the magnetic elements into separate magnetic regions, the ability of the magnetic attachment system to provide a magnetic field having the desired characteristics can be substantially enhanced. The magnetic elements 1 26 and 1 28 can interact with each other to form a magnetic field 1 1 2 . In this embodiment, the interaction can be a combination of the magnetic properties of each of the magnetic elements 126 and 128. In some examples, the configuration of magnetic elements 1 26 and 128 can be associated with each other to provide a magnetic field 1 12 having the desired characteristics. For example, magnetic elements 126 and 128 are configured in a manner that is related to one another such that the magnetic field 112 is asymmetrical (or symmetrical) with respect to the horizontal centerline of the device attachment feature 108. In another embodiment, the magnetic field 112 may be asymmetric (or symmetrical) with respect to the vertical centerline of the device attachment feature configuration 108. In still other embodiments, the magnetic -28-M430792 field 112 may be asymmetrical (or symmetric) both horizontally and vertically. Figure 7A shows the electronic device 1 〇〇 in close proximity to the article 200 having the magnetic attachment feature 202. The magnetic attachment feature 202 of the article 200. may include magnetic elements, each magnetic element generating a magnetic field, the magnetic fields The interaction can be combined to form a resulting magnetic field. The resultant magnetic field may have magnetic properties (e.g., field strength and shape φ) that can interact with the magnetic field 112 of the electronic device 1 to provide the electronic device 100 and the object 200 with a clear and precise It can be attached in a repeatable manner without mechanical fasteners and without external assistance. It should be noted that the magnetic field 208 is approximately 2500 Gauss, and the magnetic field 12 is about 1 400 Gauss when the device attachment feature 108 is in the inactive state. Object 200 can be in many forms including accessories, peripherals, electronics, or the like. In an embodiment, the object 200 may be in the form of the electronic device 100 or the like. Accordingly, the electronic device 100 and the electrical device 200 can be magnetically attached to each other using the device attachment feature 108 and the magnetic attachment feature 202 to form a cooperative electronic system. The cooperative electronic system may be an electronic system in which electronic components in the electronic device 100 and corresponding electronic components in the electronic device 200 cooperate with each other to implement functions in which the two electronic devices are separated from each other and cannot be independently implemented. In an embodiment, information can be transmitted between the electronic devices 100 and 200. In particular, the magnetic attachment feature 202 can include at least magnetic elements 204 and 206, each of which can generate a magnetic field that the magnetic fields can interact with each other to provide a magnetic field 208 (only a portion of which is shown). The M430792 characteristics are based on the interaction of each of the magnetic elements 204 and 206. In this manner, magnetic field 208 can have a physical layout, relative dimensions, and magnetic characteristics that make up the magnetic poles, depending on each of magnetic elements 204 and 206. For example, magnetic elements 204 and 206 can be disposed along a centerline and have stackable magnetism to provide a magnetic field 208 having desired characteristics. The magnetic flux density B2Q8 of the magnetic field 208 of the object 200 can be varied as a function of the distance from the magnetic elements 204 and 206 (i.e., B = B2G8(x)). When the form of the object 200 is an electronic device, such as the electronic device 100, the magnetic flux density B2Q8 satisfies the formula (1). However, when the form of the article 200 is an accessory device, the magnetic flux density B 2 0 8 of the accessory device 200 can satisfy the formula (2) unlike the magnetic flux density B112 of the electronic device 1 that satisfies the formula (1). B2O8 (X = Xl + S) > Bthreshold Formula (2) where S is the thickness of the outer casing 212 at the side 212a, and X| is the internal separation distance. In this manner, the accessory device 200 can magnetically interact with the electronic device 100 and be removed from the electronic device 1 further than otherwise. Accordingly, the accessory device 200 can be disposed adjacent to, but not necessarily in close proximity to, the electronic device 1 to enable the electronic device 1 and the article 200 to be magnetically coupled to each other in a clear, predictable, and repeatable manner. Ground adsorption. In addition to the magnetic attachment feature 206, the accessory device 200 can further include a magnetic attachment feature 216 that can be used to interact with the fixed attachment feature 11〇. The magnetic attachment feature 216 can include a plurality of magnetically active members. Some of the magnetic elements may be in a form configured to cooperatively interact with magnetic elements corresponding to within the solid -30-M430792 fixed attachment feature 110. Other magnetic elements may be more passive in nature because they provide a mechanism for completing a magnetic circuit with the magnetically active elements within the fixed attachment feature 110. An example of such a magnetically driven element is a body-containing magnetic material, such as, for example, iron or steel, which can interact with a magnetic element that actively provides an associated magnetic field. In this manner, the ferrous magnetic material can interact with the magnetic field to complete a magnetic circuit between the passive component within the magnetic attachment feature 216 and the active component within the fixed attachment feature 110. Figure 7B shows that the accessory device 200 can be used to provide support functions and services for the electronic device. By allowing a portion of the magnetic field 208 (which has a magnetic flux density B2Q8 that satisfies equation (2)) to extend into the region 214, the magnetic attraction force Fnet between the device attachment feature 108 and the magnetic attachment feature 202 can be generated. , wherein the net magnetic attraction force Fnet satisfies the formula (3a) and the formula (3b).

Fnet _ (Ltotal) · B / |1〇 式(3a) B/B〇 = f(xsep) 式(3b) 其中,Lt()tal爲該等磁性元件的總面積;B爲總磁通量密 度(B2〇8 + B112) ; xsep爲磁性元件之間分開的距離;B0爲在 該等磁區的表面的磁通量密度。 因磁場2 0 8與磁場112的相互作用而產生的淨磁吸力 量Fnet的關係,磁性附著特徵構造2 02可被用來激活裝置 附著特徵構造108。又,當該裝置附著特徵構造108被激 活時,磁通量密度B112即滿足式(4)。 -31 - M430792 B| n(x = x〇 + 〇 > Baueshoid, ^(4) 在有作用狀態在磁區214內磁通量密度B112的提高可實 質地增強配件裝置2 00與電子裝置100之間的淨磁吸力量 Fnet。又,因爲該淨磁吸力量 Fnet隨著總磁通量密度 (B2Q8 + B μ 2)而改變且磁通量密度B大體上與分開距離成反 比地改變(式(3b)),當電子裝置100與配件裝置200彼此 接近且分開距離xsep減小至一與電子裝置100及配件裝置 200實體接觸相一致的極限値時,該淨磁吸力量Fnet的增 加可在一相當短的時間之內快速地提高。淨磁吸力量Fne, 的此一快速的增加可造成這兩個裝置迅速地結合在一起, 其如圖7C所示,可被稱爲“快速嵌至定位”,圖7C顯 示電子裝置100沿著嚙合表面218被磁性地吸附至配件裝 置2 00的合作系統300。應指出的是,在一代表性的實施 例中,在該裝置附著特徵構造108內的該等磁性元件可以 是N52型磁鐵,而在附著特徵構造216內的該等磁性元 件216可以是N3 5型磁鐵。又,該淨磁吸力是約1〇牛頓 到至少20牛頓,其中需要約3牛頓來激活該裝置附著特 徵構造1 08。 介於裝置100與裝置200之間在嚙合表面218的總磁 吸力量FNET可用所有被耦合的磁性元件的所有淨磁吸力 量Fneti的總和推導出來。換言之,Fnet滿足式(5) Fnet^X" 式(5) 其中是η個構件的每一者的淨磁吸力量Fneti »在一實施例 中,淨磁吸力量Fneti與該嚙合表面21 8被磁場1 12及磁 -32- M430792 場208交截(intersect)的部分實質地相正交。 爲了要確保沿著裝置1〇〇與裝置200之間的嚙合表面 的總磁吸力量FNET是均勻的,在附著特徵構造1〇8與202 內的每一對應的磁性元件間的分開距離都予以確實地控 制。該分開距離可藉由,例如,將該等磁性元件形塑成與 該等裝置的形狀相符的形狀來予以確實地控制。例如,如 果裝置100具有曲線板(彎曲的)形狀的外殼的話,在裝置 100內的磁性元件可被作成與該彎曲的形狀相符的形狀。 此外,該等磁性元件可用以種可讓相對應的磁性元件的磁 向量彼此對準的方式來形成。以此方式,該淨磁吸力量的 大小及方向即可所想要地予以控制。 對準磁向量的一個結果爲,每一磁性元件間的淨磁吸 力量的方向可被確實地控制。又,藉由將對應的磁性元件 之間的分開距離減小至一最小値,每一磁性元件間的淨磁 吸力量Fneti可被最大化。此外,保持一實質均勻的分開 距離於不同的磁性元件之間,一相對應的均勻磁吸力量可 沿著該嚙合表面218被提供。又,藉由適當地調整該等相 對應的磁向量,FNET可被垂直地施加至該嚙合表面。 除了將相對應的磁性元件間的分開距離最小化之外, 相對應的磁性元件間的磁通量密度可藉由使用分磁器 (magnetic shunt)來提高。一可用磁活性材料,譬如鋼或 鐵,製造的分磁器可被放置在或靠近一磁性元件,其對於 將磁通量線引導於所想要的方向上具有影響。以此方式, 原本將傳播於一遠離一對應的性元件的方向上的該等磁通 -33- M430792 量線可被部分地重新引導朝向一所想要的方向’譬如朝向 一介於該等裝置之間的一磁性附著區,藉以提高整體磁通 量密度。因此,增加磁性元件間可獲得的磁通量密度可產 生淨磁吸力量的實質增強的結果》 圖8A顯示附著特徵構造110的一實施例。詳言之’ 附著特徵構造110可以是外殼102的一部分。詳言之’該 附著特徵構造可包括可被安裝在該外殼102的突出部404 的磁性元件4 0 2 »磁性元件4 0 2可廣泛地變化。例如,磁 性元件402可被配置成在該突出部404上的陣列,用來將 一配件裝置的至少一部分附著電子裝置100的一特定面向 (aspect)。例如,當該配件裝置是一摺片的形式時,該等 磁性元件402可被用來將該摺片磁性地附著至該電子裝置 100以覆蓋顯示器的至少一部分》該陣列的大小及形狀亦 可廣泛地改變。在圖8A所示的實施例中,該陣列可以是 矩形的且被作成包含該突出部404的實質部分的大小。 圖8B顯示多個可被包含在一配件裝置內作爲附著特 徵構造216的一部分的磁性元件410。該等磁性元件410 的一部分,但非全部,可對應磁性元件402且被用來將該 配件200磁性地附著至該電子裝置100。在另一實施例 中,所有或絕大部分的磁性元件410可被用來將配件裝置 200的諸部分固定在一起以形成可以與該電子裝置1〇〇配 合使用之其它支撐結構。在一實施例中,磁性元件414可 被用來激活一磁性敏感電路,譬如霍耳效應感測器118« 圖9A-9C顯示依據一被描述的實施例的代表性磁性 -34- M430792 附著特徵構造5 00。該磁性附著特徵構造5 00例如可對應 於圖6及圖7A-7C所示的裝置附照特徵構造108。在不作 • 用的狀態中,在該磁性附著特徵構造5 00內的磁性元件可 . 被設置成遠離外殼1〇2用以讓傳播(propagate)穿過外殼 102的磁場線最少化。在另一方面,在有作用的狀態中, 該等磁性元件可朝向該外殼102移動以增加傳播穿過該外 殼102的磁場線的數量藉以滿足式(2)。 $ 該等磁性元件移動的方式可以廣泛地變化。在一例子 中,該等磁性元件可轉動、樞轉、平移、滑移或類此者。 在一例子中,該等磁性元件可被設置在一可容許該等磁性 元件從一對應於該不作用的第一位置滑移至一對應於該有 作用的第二位置的通道內。 在示於圖9A-9C的該特定的實施例中,該磁性附著 特徵構造500可包括磁性元件502其具有在一段期間內保 持穩定的磁特性。例如,該等磁性附著特性在該電子裝置 Φ 100的預期使用壽命期間都保持穩定。以此方式,該等磁 體的每一者的磁場的相互作用所形成的磁場亦將維持穩 定。磁場的穩定性可產生一可重複的附著方法的結果。此 可重複性在該電子裝置100經歷與其它被適當地建構之需 要一持續地精確放置的物件,譬如配件裝置200,無數且 重複的附著週期(附著/分離)的時候是特別有用的。 在所示的代表性實施例中,磁性元件502可以有許多 形式》例如,磁性元件502可以是多個以特定的順序及具 有穩定的磁特性(譬如,磁極及本徵(intrinsic)磁強度)的 -35- M430792 組態被配置的磁鐵的形式。然而,爲了要在該磁性附著特 徵構造500在不作用的狀態時滿足式(1),磁性元件502 必需保持離外殼102的外部至少x = (XQ + t)的距離。換言 之,爲了滿足式(1),該磁性附著特徵構造500的尺度必 需至少考量磁性元件502的磁特性及實體佈局。 因此,磁性元件502可被附著至一被配置來施加保持 力 Fretain 的保持機構(retaining mechanism)504。保持力Fnet _ (Ltotal) · B / |1〇(3a) B/B〇= f(xsep) where (3b) where Lt()tal is the total area of the magnetic elements; B is the total magnetic flux density (B2) 〇8 + B112) ; xsep is the distance separating the magnetic elements; B0 is the magnetic flux density at the surface of the magnetic regions. The magnetic attachment feature 02 can be used to activate the device attachment feature 108 due to the net magnetic attraction Fnet resulting from the interaction of the magnetic field 206 with the magnetic field 112. Also, when the device attachment feature 108 is activated, the magnetic flux density B 112 satisfies equation (4). -31 - M430792 B| n(x = x〇+ 〇> Baueshoid, ^(4) The increase in magnetic flux density B112 in the magnetic region 214 in an active state substantially enhances the relationship between the accessory device 200 and the electronic device 100. Net net magnetic force Fnet. Again, because the net magnetic attraction force Fnet changes with the total magnetic flux density (B2Q8 + B μ 2) and the magnetic flux density B changes substantially inversely proportional to the separation distance (formula (3b)), When the electronic device 100 and the accessory device 200 are close to each other and the separation distance xsep is reduced to a limit 一致 which is in physical contact with the electronic device 100 and the accessory device 200, the increase of the net magnetic force Fnet can be performed in a relatively short time. Rapid increase within. This rapid increase in net magnetic force Fne, can cause the two devices to be quickly joined together, as shown in Figure 7C, which can be referred to as "quick embedding to positioning", Figure 7C The display electronics 100 are magnetically adsorbed along the engagement surface 218 to the cooperation system 300 of the accessory device 200. It should be noted that in a representative embodiment, the magnetic components within the device attachment feature 108 are It can be a N52 magnet, The magnetic elements 216 within the attachment features 216 may be N3 type 5 magnets. Again, the net magnetic attraction is from about 1 Newton to at least 20 Newtons, wherein about 3 Newtons is required to activate the device attachment feature 108. The total magnetic attraction force FNET between the device 100 and the device 200 at the engagement surface 218 can be derived from the sum of all the net magnetic forces Fneti of all coupled magnetic elements. In other words, Fnet satisfies equation (5) Fnet^X" (5) where is the net magnetic attraction force Fneti of each of the n members. In one embodiment, the net magnetic attraction force Fneti and the meshing surface 21 8 are intersected by the magnetic field 12 and the magnetic-32-M430792 field 208. The intersecting portions are substantially orthogonal. In order to ensure that the total magnetic attraction force FNET along the meshing surface between the device 1 and the device 200 is uniform, within the attached feature configurations 1〇8 and 202 The separation distance between each corresponding magnetic element is reliably controlled. The separation distance can be reliably controlled by, for example, shaping the magnetic elements into shapes conforming to the shape of the devices. If installed 100. A housing having a curved (curved) shape, the magnetic elements within the device 100 can be shaped to conform to the curved shape. Furthermore, the magnetic elements can be used to provide magnetic properties for corresponding magnetic elements. The vectors are formed in a mutually aligned manner. In this way, the magnitude and direction of the net magnetic force can be controlled as desired. One result of aligning the magnetic vectors is the net magnetic force between each magnetic element. The direction can be reliably controlled. Moreover, by reducing the separation distance between the corresponding magnetic elements to a minimum 値, the net magnetic attraction force Fneti between each magnetic element can be maximized. Moreover, maintaining a substantially uniform separation distance between the different magnetic elements, a corresponding uniform magnetic force can be provided along the engagement surface 218. Also, FNET can be applied perpendicularly to the meshing surface by appropriately adjusting the magnetic vectors corresponding to the phases. In addition to minimizing the separation distance between the corresponding magnetic elements, the magnetic flux density between the corresponding magnetic elements can be increased by using a magnetic shunt. A magnetic separator made of a magnetically active material, such as steel or iron, can be placed at or near a magnetic element that has an effect on directing the magnetic flux lines in the desired direction. In this manner, the flux-33-M430792 line that would otherwise be propagated in a direction away from a corresponding sexual element can be partially redirected toward a desired direction, such as toward a device. A magnetic attachment zone between them to increase the overall magnetic flux density. Thus, increasing the magnetic flux density achievable between the magnetic elements can result in substantial enhancement of the net magnetic attraction force. Figure 8A shows an embodiment of the attachment feature configuration 110. In detail, the attachment feature 110 can be part of the outer casing 102. In detail, the attachment feature can include a magnetic element 4 0 2 that can be mounted to the projection 404 of the housing 102. The magnetic element 420 can vary widely. For example, magnetic element 402 can be configured as an array on the projection 404 for attaching at least a portion of an accessory device to a particular aspect of electronic device 100. For example, when the accessory device is in the form of a flap, the magnetic member 402 can be used to magnetically attach the flap to the electronic device 100 to cover at least a portion of the display. Widely changed. In the embodiment illustrated in Figure 8A, the array can be rectangular and shaped to include a substantial portion of the projection 404. Figure 8B shows a plurality of magnetic elements 410 that can be included in a fitting device as part of the attachment feature configuration 216. Some, but not all, of the magnetic elements 410 may correspond to the magnetic element 402 and be used to magnetically attach the accessory 200 to the electronic device 100. In another embodiment, all or a substantial portion of the magnetic elements 410 can be used to secure portions of the accessory device 200 together to form other support structures that can be used in conjunction with the electronic device. In an embodiment, the magnetic element 414 can be used to activate a magnetically sensitive circuit, such as a Hall effect sensor 118. Figures 9A-9C show representative magnetic-34-M430792 attachment features in accordance with a described embodiment. Construct 5 00. The magnetic attachment feature configuration 500 can correspond, for example, to the device attachment feature configuration 108 illustrated in Figures 6 and 7A-7C. In the non-operating state, the magnetic element within the magnetic attachment feature configuration 500 can be disposed away from the housing 1〇2 to minimize the magnetic field lines propagating through the housing 102. In another aspect, in an active state, the magnetic elements can be moved toward the outer casing 102 to increase the number of magnetic field lines propagating through the outer casing 102 to satisfy equation (2). The manner in which these magnetic components move can vary widely. In one example, the magnetic elements can be rotated, pivoted, translated, slipped, or the like. In one example, the magnetic elements can be disposed in a passage that allows the magnetic elements to slide from a first position corresponding to the inoperative to a second position corresponding to the action. In this particular embodiment, illustrated in Figures 9A-9C, the magnetic attachment feature 500 can include a magnetic element 502 that has a magnetic property that remains stable for a period of time. For example, the magnetic attachment characteristics remain stable during the expected lifetime of the electronic device Φ 100. In this way, the magnetic field created by the interaction of the magnetic fields of each of the magnets will also remain stable. The stability of the magnetic field produces the result of a repeatable attachment method. This repeatability is particularly useful when the electronic device 100 is subjected to an object that is continuously and accurately placed, such as the accessory device 200, with numerous, and repeated attachment cycles (attachment/separation). In the representative embodiment shown, the magnetic element 502 can take many forms. For example, the magnetic element 502 can be a plurality of in a particular order and have stable magnetic properties (e.g., magnetic pole and intrinsic magnetic strength). The -35- M430792 is configured in the form of a configured magnet. However, in order to satisfy the formula (1) when the magnetic attachment feature 500 is in an inactive state, the magnetic member 502 must maintain a distance of at least x = (XQ + t) from the outside of the outer casing 102. In other words, in order to satisfy equation (1), the dimensions of the magnetic attachment feature 500 must take into account at least the magnetic properties and physical layout of the magnetic element 502. Thus, the magnetic element 502 can be attached to a retaining mechanism 504 configured to apply a retention force Fretain. Retentivity

Fretain可被用來在該裝置附著特徵構造500是在不作用的 狀態中時將該磁性元件502保持在該裝置附著特徵構造 500內的一個會產生很小或甚至沒有磁通量洩漏至該電子 裝置100外(即,滿足式(1))的位置處》在一實施例中,該 保持機構504可以是一被設置來根據式(6)提供保持力Fretain can be used to maintain the magnetic element 502 within the device attachment feature 500 when the device attachment feature 500 is in an inactive state, resulting in little or no leakage of magnetic flux to the electronic device 100. Outside (ie, at a position that satisfies equation (1)), in one embodiment, the retention mechanism 504 can be configured to provide retention according to equation (6)

Fretain的彈簧的形式:Fretain's spring form:

Ke,cin=k-Ax 式⑹ 其中,k是保持機構5 04的彈簧常數,及Δχ爲彈簧離平 衡點的位移。 例如,圖9Β顯示該代表性的磁性附著特徵構造500 在有作用的狀態。藉由適當地建構該磁性元件502及在該 配件附著特徵構造204內的磁性元件,所得到的磁性元件 502的磁場與配件附著特徵構造204產生的磁場的磁性相 互作用可產生至少與激活該磁性附著特徵構造5 00所需的 吸附磁力一樣大的淨吸附磁力。換言之,該淨吸附磁力可 具有至少是滿足式(7)的激活力量Faet大小的大小’藉以 克服保持力Fretain促使磁性元件502從該不作用的位置 -36- M430792 (即,χ = 0)移動至有作用的位置(即,χ = χ〇),Ke,cin=k-Ax (6) where k is the spring constant of the holding mechanism 504, and Δχ is the displacement of the spring from the equilibrium point. For example, Figure 9A shows the representative magnetic attachment feature 500 in an active state. By properly constructing the magnetic element 502 and the magnetic element within the accessory attachment feature 204, the magnetic interaction of the resulting magnetic element 502 with the magnetic field generated by the accessory attachment feature 204 can produce at least the activation of the magnetic The attachment feature constructs a net adsorption magnetic force that is as large as the adsorption magnetic force required for 500. In other words, the net sorption magnetic force can have a magnitude that satisfies at least the magnitude of the activation force Faet of equation (7), thereby overcoming the retention force Fretain causing the magnetic element 502 to move from the inactive position -36-M430792 (ie, χ = 0) To the active position (ie, χ = χ〇),

Fact ^ Fretain (Δχ = X〇) 式⑺ ο 然而,只有產生具有與磁性元件5 02的磁場特性“匹 ' 配”的特性的磁場的另一磁性附著特徵構造才可以激活該 磁性附著特徵構造5 00。因此,如圖9C所示,位在外殼 102的外表面(即,x = X() + t)以磁活性材料(譬如,鋼)形成的 物件506的存在無法激活該磁性附著特徵構造500 »更明 • 確地,在一實施例中,產生在該物件506與該磁性附著特 徵構造500之間的淨磁吸力小於2NT,而激活力量Fact 需要3NT的大小。 更明確地,爲了要從不作用的狀態轉變成有作用的狀 態,產生在磁性元件502與物件506之間的磁力必需大於 該激活力量FACT。然而,由位在該外殼102的外表面的 該磁性元件502產生的磁場的磁通量密度小於Bthresh(>ld, 產生在物件506與磁性元件502之間的任何磁力實質地小 ® 於Fretain,因此無法滿足式(7)。因此,磁性元件502保持 著被固定在約x = 〇的定位處且磁性附著特徵構造500無法 經歷從不作用的狀態變成有作用的狀態的轉變。 應被理解的是,該彈簧可廣泛地改變。例如,它可根 據運動的種類而改變。它的例子包括張力彈簧、壓縮彈 簧、扭力彈簧、板片彈簧及類此者。在一特定的實施方式 中,板片彈簧被使用。 應指出的是,在一些實施例中,磁性元件5 02可用一 種無需使用彈簧的方式被固定。在這些實施例中,雖然式 -37- M430792 (1)無法被滿足,但它仍然是一可實施的配置。 圖10顯示依據本創作的一個實施例的裝置附著特徵 構造6 00的實施例。附著特徵構造600可對應於圖6及圖 7A-7C中的元件208。此實施例類似於圖9A-9C所示的實 施例,但不同處在於,使用的是多個機構或更明確地一對 磁性元件602及磁性元件604形式的機構,而不是單一機 構。詳言之,圖10顯示在有作用的狀態中的裝置附著特 徵構造600 »更明確地,附著至磁性元件602的彈簧606 及附著至磁性元件604的彈簧608每一者都被延伸△ X的 距離。 在此系統中,該二機構合作以形成該磁場。它們可獨 立地運動或它們可連接在一起並像一個單元般地運動。彈 簧力及磁力可改變。例如,該系統可以是對稱的或不對稱 的。該等磁性元件的配置可以是相類似的或是不同的。該 等磁性元件的配置可以是對稱的或是不對稱的。該組態係 依據該系統的需要而定。 該磁性附著系統可以有許多形式,每一種形式都可提 供可重複且精確的磁性附著機構,其可被用來將多個被適 當地建構的物件附著在一起》 圖11 A-11B顯示裝置附著特徵構造108以依據一實 施例的裝置附著特徵構造700形式呈現的特定實施方式。 該裝置附著特徵構造可對應於圖6及圖7A-7C所示的元 件108。在一些例子中,裝置附著特徵構造7 00可與圖10 所示的彈簧606及608配合使用。如圖1 1A所示,裝置 M430792 附著特徵構造700被示出。詳言之,裝置附著特徵構造 700是在不作用的狀態,其具有磁性組件702形式的磁性 • 元件,該磁性組件可被包覆在一包封物內。以此方式,一 . 附著於該磁性組件702的保持機構(未示出)可施加相關連 的保持力 Fretain。保持力Fretain可被用來將該磁性組件 702保持在一個與處在不作用的狀態的該裝置附著特徵構 造700 —致的位置(即,滿足式(1))。 | 磁性組件702每一者都包括個別的磁鐵。在被描述的 實施例中,該等個別的磁鐵可被置成一結構,在該結構中 磁鐵的磁極可被定向以形成一經過編碼的(coded)磁性結 構。該經過編碼的磁性結構可用一連串的磁極及在一些例 子中磁強度來形成。換言之,該一連串的磁極可用例如 {+1,+1,-1,+1,-1,+1,-1,-1}來表示。在此特定的 例子中,“ +1 ”係指該磁鐵的方向及強度。因此,正號 “+”表示被對準的相對應的磁鐵具有在一特定的方向上 Φ 的磁向量,負號表示在一相反方向上的磁向量, “ 1”表示一單位磁鐵的強度。 當多個相同磁極的磁鐵被彼此緊鄰地放置時,來自該 等磁鐵的每一者的磁場可相結合致使該等磁體可被視爲等 同於一單一的磁鐵,該單一磁鐵具有該等磁鐵的結合的特 性。例如,代表八個個別的磁鐵的該經過編碼的磁性序列 { + 1’ +1,-1,+1,-1,+1,-1,-1}可被視爲等同於體現 爲六個個別的磁鐵的陣列之經過編碼的磁性序列{ + 2,-1 ,+1,-1,+1,-2}。在一實施例中,在第一個及最後一 -39- M430792 個位置的磁鐵可具有與該陣列中其它磁鐵相同的磁性強度 但大小是其它磁鐵的兩倍大。在吳一方面,在第一個及最 後一個位置的磁鐵可具有與該陣列中其它磁鐵大致相同的 大小但磁強度是其它磁鐵的兩倍。在任何一種情況中,磁 特性的等同性可提供一更小巧的經過邊碼的磁鐵序列。較 小的尺寸有助於減輕重量且可保留容納該磁性附著特徵構 造所需之有價値的內部空間。此外,因爲磁通量密度與磁 場線傳播通過的面積直接相關,所以一給定的磁通量傳播 通過的面積減小時,所得到的磁通量密度就會提高。 在一實施例中,磁性組件702可包括個別的磁鐵 712a,712b,及712c其分別具有2L,1L及1L的相對尺 寸,其中“ L”表示一單位長度。應指出的是,如上文所 討論的,一具有“ 2L”相對尺寸的磁鐵可被體現爲一個具 有“ 2L”的實體長度的單一磁鐵、兩個具有“1L”長度 之並置的磁鐵且它們的磁極彼此對準、或一個具有單元長 度L及磁性強度是其它磁鐵的兩倍的磁鐵。因此,對於此 討論的其餘部分而言,關於2L及1L的用詞,“L”可代 表一個單元長度且該磁鐵的相對強度可用相關連的數字來 表示。例如,一具有相對磁性強度爲“1”但長度爲 “2L”的磁鐵可被視爲等同於一具有相對磁性強度爲 “ 2 ”且長度爲“ 1 L”的磁鐵。以此方式,相對磁性強度 及方位這兩者都可被用來形成該經過編碼的磁性結構。 例如,磁鐵712a可具有一約爲磁鐵712b或712c的 長度的兩倍的整體長度。在另一方面,磁鐵712a可具有 -40- M430792 與磁鐵712b及712c相同的長度,但具有一磁性強度其爲 磁鐵7 1 2b及7 1 2c的磁性強度的兩倍。在另一實施例中, • 磁鐵712a可以是一用兩個(或更多個)磁極被對準的組成 • 磁鐵(constituent magnets)所形成的等效磁鐵。 在一實施例中,磁鐵712a,712b,712c彼此係被間 隔開一預定的距離。例如,在一實施例中,該等磁鐵彼此 被間隔開一相同的距離。此間距當然是根據被產生的磁場 φ 之所想要的磁特性。在另一實施例中,那些具有非對準的 磁極的磁鐵可彼此磁性地附著。以此方式,形成在相鄰的 磁鐵之間之磁性的結合可被用來保持在該磁性組件中該磁 鐵序列的完整性。然而,那些具有對準的磁極的磁鐵必需 藉由可克服產生在兩對準的磁鐵之間相斥的磁力之外部施 加的力量來將它們保持在一起。 除了尺寸與位置之外,磁鐵712a,712b,712c的磁 極可根據被產生的磁場之所想要的特性來加以選擇。然 φ 而,在所示的實施例中,磁性元件彼此端對端地磁性耦合 藉以減少所需的空間且藉由縮小磁場線傳播通過的整體區 域來提高磁通量密度。 詳言之,磁性組件702可具有一特定的極性模式組, 在該極性模式組中磁鐵712a,712b,712c以一種它們的 N或S磁極以特定方式予以對準(或未對準)的方式被定 向。例如,在磁性組件702中的磁鐵可被配置成形成第一 經過編碼的磁性結構{ + 1,-1,+1},在該磁性結構中磁鐵 712a,712b,712c的磁極係根據第一極性模式{PI,P2, -41 - M430792 P1}予以對準,該極性模式表示磁鐵712a的磁極相關於磁 鐵712b是未對準的,磁鐵712b相關於磁鐵712c是未對 準的。 磁性組件7〇2亦可包括個別的磁鐵 714a,714b, 714c且分別具有1L,1L及2L的相對尺寸。又,磁鐵 714a,714b,714c可被配置成它們個自的磁極係根據第 二極性模式{P2,PI,P2}予以對準,該第二極性模式與第 一極性模式{P1,P2,P1 }相反(或互補)。就該經過編碼的 磁性結構而言,磁鐵714a,714b,714c可根據第二編碼 的磁性序列{-1,+1,-1}予以對準,該第二編碼的磁性序 列與第一編碼的磁性序列{ + 1,-1,+1}相反或互補。磁鐵 712a, 712b, 712c 與 714a, 714b, 714c 之間非對稱的關 係提供一相對於中心線7 1 6非對稱的磁場。 圖11 A及11B亦顯示配件附著特徵構造800的特定 實施方式,該配件附著特徵構造可對應於圖6及圖7 A-7C 所示的元件202。磁性組件802可包括數個磁性元件。該 等磁性元件可用一種該結合的磁場與該磁性組件702的磁 場相匹配的方式來予以配置。 磁性組件 802可包括磁鐵 802a,802b,802c,每一 磁鐵與磁性組件702中對應的磁鐵712a,712b,712c的 大小大致相同。然而,爲了要將淨磁吸力Fnet最大化並將 磁場間的磁性相互作用驅使至一所想要的平衡,磁鐵 802a,802b,802c根據第二極性模式{P2,PI,P2}予以 對準"磁性組件 802亦可包括磁鐵 804a,804b,804c, M430792 每一磁鐵都與對應的磁鐵 714a,714b,714c的大小大致 相同。又,爲了要保持磁場之間磁互動的整體目標在所想 要的裝置組態是平衡的,磁鐵804a,804b,804c可根據 第一極性模式{PI,P2, P1}予以對準。 圖1 1B顯示裝置附著特徵構造700因爲磁性組件702 與8 02之間的磁性相互作用而處在該有作用的狀態。詳言 之,因爲裝置附著特徵構造7 00的磁性元件的配置與配件 附著特徵構造8 00的磁性元件的配置“相匹配”,所以磁 場之間的磁性相互作用可造成磁性組件702從不作用的狀 態(即,X = 0)移動至該有作用的狀態(即,x = x〇)。 圖12例示用於該磁性組件702的磁性結構與磁性組 件8 02的互補磁性結構之一連串的相對移位位置。磁性組 件702係用經過編碼的序列{ + 2,-1,+1,-1,+1,-2}來 予以編碼。磁性組件802係用經過編碼的序列{-2,+1,-1,+1,-1,+2}來予以編碼。對於此例子而言,該等磁鐵 可具有相同或實質相同的磁場強度(或振幅),爲了此例 子,此磁場強度被提供以1爲一單元(其中A =相吸,R =相 斥,A = -R,A=1,R = -l) »在此例子中,磁性組件702及 802相對於彼此每次被移動一“1L”的長度(應指出的 是,相對於該經過編碼的磁性序列的中心線7 1 6非對稱可 讓向左移位的結果對映出(mirror)向右移位的結果,所以 只有向右移位被示出)。 對於每一相對的對而言,相斥的磁鐵的數量加上相吸 的磁鐵的數量都被計算,每一對準都具有依據一磁力函數 -43- M430792 的總力,該磁力函數係以該等磁鐵的磁場強度爲根據。換 言之,第一及第二磁鐵結構間的總磁力是由在沿著該結構 從左至右的每一磁鐵位置之與位在相對立的磁鐵結構中直 接相對的對應磁鐵相互作用的每一磁鐵或磁鐵對的個別力 量總和來決定的。當只有一個磁鐵存在時,對應的磁鐵是 是〇,且該力量爲〇。當有兩個磁鐵存在時,每一單元磁 鐵的力量爲R(相同磁極)或A(相反磁極)。 每一圖的總磁力可被計算且與每一的相對移位値一起 被顯示。因此,使用一特定的經過編碼的磁性序列{ + 2, -1,+1,-1,+1,-2}可得到變動範圍從-3(即,3R)至 + 8(即,+8A)的淨磁吸力Fnet,其中峰値是在磁性組件702 與8 02被對準使得它們各自的碼亦被對準時發生。應指出 的是,離峰的淨磁吸力係變動於-3至+4之間。因此,該 淨磁吸力可造成該磁性組件702大體上彼此相斥,除非它 們被對準致使它們的磁鐵的每一者與一互補的磁鐵相互關 聯(即,一磁鐵的南極與另一磁鐵的北極對準,或反之亦 可)。換言之,磁性組件702與8 02在它們被對準使得它 們實質上彼此相對映的時候是高度相互關聯的。 應指出的是,當磁性組件702與802相位差180°時 (即,類似於頭尾沒有對準,亦被稱爲上下顛倒),所產生 的淨磁力可以是8R。因此,藉由使用磁性組件702及802 而彼此磁性地附著的裝置被上下顛倒地附著是極不可能 的。 圖13例兩函數Fnet(L)的圖表。函數Fnet(L)描述淨 M430792 磁力FNET爲圖12所示磁性組件702及磁性組件802內的 經過編碼的磁鐵結構的移位位移(L)的函數。應指出的 是,在磁性組件702及802中該等經過編碼的磁鐵結構相 對於中心線716對稱本質提供該函數FNET(L)相對於中心 線716是不對稱的。以此方式,圖12的結果可被畫在中 心線7 1 6的右側且相對於中心線7 1 6被反射以位在圖表 9 0 0的左側。 如圖13所示,函數FNET(L)在磁性組件702及802相 互關聯於一個對應於中心線716的位置時具有一全域最大 値(global maximum)。換言之,當磁性組件702及802中 具有相反磁極的所有磁性元件彼此對準時,函數 FNET(L = 0)達到最大値(β卩,8A)。任何其它的組態(即,函 數FNET(L夫0))得到的結果是淨磁力FNET小於該全域最大 値(8A)。然而,應進一步被指出的是,該函數FNET(L)具 有至少兩個局部最大値(即,函數FNET(L = ±3))其允許磁性 組件702與802之間有一弱的附著。然而,一強的耐久的 附著只會在與該磁性組件702相關聯的該裝置磁性附著特 徵構造7 00被適當地激活時才發生。因此,藉由建立滿足 式(8)的激活力FACT,即可避免該裝置磁性附著特徵構造 700的一“假的激活(false activation)”或磁性裝置702 與8 0 2之間一弱的附著。Fact ^ Fretain (Δχ = X〇) Equation (7) ο However, only the magnetic attachment feature configuration that produces a magnetic field having a characteristic of "matching" the magnetic field characteristics of the magnetic element 502 can activate the magnetic attachment feature configuration 5. 00. Thus, as shown in Figure 9C, the presence of an object 506 formed on the outer surface of the outer casing 102 (i.e., x = X() + t) with a magnetically active material (e.g., steel) cannot activate the magnetic attachment feature configuration 500 » More specifically, in one embodiment, the net magnetic attraction generated between the article 506 and the magnetic attachment feature 500 is less than 2 NT, and the activation force Fact requires a size of 3 NT. More specifically, in order to transition from an inactive state to an active state, the magnetic force generated between the magnetic element 502 and the object 506 must be greater than the activation force FACT. However, the magnetic flux generated by the magnetic element 502 located on the outer surface of the outer casing 102 has a magnetic flux density less than Bthresh (>ld, which produces substantially less magnetic force between the object 506 and the magnetic element 502. Equation (7) cannot be satisfied. Therefore, the magnetic element 502 remains fixed at a position of about x = 且 and the magnetic attachment feature configuration 500 cannot undergo a transition from an inactive state to an inactive state. It should be understood that The spring can vary widely. For example, it can vary depending on the type of motion. Examples of this include tension springs, compression springs, torsion springs, leaf springs, and the like. In a particular embodiment, the plates A spring is used. It should be noted that in some embodiments, the magnetic element 052 can be secured in a manner that does not require the use of a spring. In these embodiments, although the formula -37-M430792 (1) cannot be satisfied, it Still an implementable configuration. Figure 10 shows an embodiment of a device attachment feature configuration 600 in accordance with one embodiment of the present author. Attachment feature configuration 600 may correspond to a diagram 6 and elements 208 of Figures 7A-7C. This embodiment is similar to the embodiment shown in Figures 9A-9C, but differs in that a plurality of mechanisms or more specifically a pair of magnetic elements 602 and magnetic elements 604 are used. Formal mechanism, rather than a single mechanism. In particular, Figure 10 shows the device attachment feature configuration 600 in an active state. More specifically, the spring 606 attached to the magnetic element 602 and the spring 608 attached to the magnetic element 604 Each is extended by a distance of Δ X. In this system, the two mechanisms cooperate to form the magnetic field. They can move independently or they can be connected together and move like a unit. The spring force and magnetic force can be changed. For example, the system can be symmetrical or asymmetrical. The configuration of the magnetic elements can be similar or different. The configuration of the magnetic elements can be symmetrical or asymmetrical. Depending on the needs of the system. The magnetic attachment system can take many forms, each of which provides a repeatable and precise magnetic attachment mechanism that can be used to properly build multiple The attached objects are attached together. Figure 11 A-11B shows a particular embodiment of the device attachment feature configuration 108 in the form of a device attachment feature configuration 700 in accordance with an embodiment. The device attachment feature configuration may correspond to Figures 6 and 7A- Element 108 is shown at 7C. In some examples, device attachment feature 70 can be used in conjunction with springs 606 and 608 shown in Figure 10. As shown in Figure 11A, device M430792 attachment feature 700 is shown. In other words, the device attachment feature 700 is in an inactive state having a magnetic element in the form of a magnetic component 702 that can be coated within an enclosure. In this manner, a magnetic A retention mechanism (not shown) of assembly 702 can apply an associated retention force Fretain. The retention force Fretain can be used to maintain the magnetic assembly 702 in a position that is consistent with the device attachment feature configuration 700 in an inactive state (i.e., satisfies equation (1)). Each of the magnetic components 702 includes an individual magnet. In the depicted embodiment, the individual magnets can be configured in a configuration in which the magnetic poles of the magnet can be oriented to form a coded magnetic structure. The encoded magnetic structure can be formed using a series of magnetic poles and magnetic strength in some examples. In other words, the series of magnetic poles can be represented by, for example, {+1, +1, -1, +1, -1, +1, -1, -1}. In this particular example, "+1" refers to the direction and strength of the magnet. Therefore, the positive sign "+" indicates that the corresponding magnet being aligned has a magnetic vector of Φ in a specific direction, the negative sign indicates a magnetic vector in an opposite direction, and "1" indicates the intensity of a unit magnet. When a plurality of magnets of the same magnetic pole are placed in close proximity to one another, the magnetic fields from each of the magnets can be combined such that the magnets can be considered equivalent to a single magnet having the magnets Combined characteristics. For example, the encoded magnetic sequence { + 1' +1, -1, +1, -1, +1, -1, -1} representing eight individual magnets can be considered equivalent to six The encoded magnetic sequence of the array of individual magnets { + 2, -1, +1, -1, +1, -2}. In one embodiment, the magnets at the first and last -39-M430792 positions may have the same magnetic strength as the other magnets in the array but are twice as large as the other magnets. On the one hand, the magnets in the first and last positions may have substantially the same size as the other magnets in the array but have twice the magnetic strength of the other magnets. In either case, the equivalence of magnetic properties provides a smaller sequence of edge-coded magnets. The smaller size helps to reduce weight and retains the valuable internal space required to accommodate the magnetic attachment feature. In addition, since the magnetic flux density is directly related to the area through which the magnetic field lines propagate, the resulting magnetic flux density increases as the area through which a given magnetic flux propagates decreases. In one embodiment, magnetic component 702 can include individual magnets 712a, 712b, and 712c having relative dimensions of 2L, 1L, and 1L, respectively, where "L" represents a unit length. It should be noted that, as discussed above, a magnet having a relative size of "2L" can be embodied as a single magnet having a solid length of "2L", two juxtaposed magnets having a length of "1L" and their The magnetic poles are aligned with each other, or a magnet having a unit length L and a magnetic strength twice that of other magnets. Thus, for the remainder of this discussion, with respect to the terms 2L and 1L, "L" can represent a unit length and the relative strength of the magnet can be represented by an associated number. For example, a magnet having a relative magnetic strength of "1" but a length of "2L" can be regarded as equivalent to a magnet having a relative magnetic strength of "2" and a length of "1 L". In this way, both relative magnetic strength and orientation can be used to form the encoded magnetic structure. For example, magnet 712a can have an overall length that is approximately twice the length of magnet 712b or 712c. On the other hand, the magnet 712a may have -40-M430792 having the same length as the magnets 712b and 712c, but having a magnetic strength which is twice the magnetic strength of the magnets 7 1 2b and 7 1 2c. In another embodiment, • magnet 712a may be an equivalent magnet formed by two or more magnetic poles of aligned constituent magnets. In one embodiment, the magnets 712a, 712b, 712c are spaced apart from each other by a predetermined distance. For example, in one embodiment, the magnets are spaced apart from one another by the same distance. This spacing is of course based on the desired magnetic properties of the generated magnetic field φ. In another embodiment, those magnets having non-aligned poles may be magnetically attached to each other. In this manner, a magnetic bond formed between adjacent magnets can be used to maintain the integrity of the magnet sequence in the magnetic assembly. However, those magnets with aligned poles must hold them together by overcoming the force applied to the outside of the magnetic force that repels the reciprocal between the two aligned magnets. In addition to size and position, the poles of the magnets 712a, 712b, 712c can be selected based on the desired characteristics of the magnetic field being generated. While φ, in the illustrated embodiment, the magnetic elements are magnetically coupled end-to-end with each other to reduce the space required and to increase the magnetic flux density by reducing the overall area through which the magnetic field lines propagate. In particular, magnetic component 702 can have a particular set of polarity patterns in which magnets 712a, 712b, 712c are aligned (or misaligned) in a particular manner with their N or S poles. Oriented. For example, the magnets in the magnetic assembly 702 can be configured to form a first encoded magnetic structure {+ 1, -1, +1} in which the magnetic poles of the magnets 712a, 712b, 712c are based on the first polarity The pattern {PI, P2, -41 - M430792 P1} is aligned, the polarity pattern indicating that the magnetic pole of the magnet 712a is misaligned with respect to the magnet 712b, and the magnet 712b is misaligned with respect to the magnet 712c. The magnetic component 7〇2 may also include individual magnets 714a, 714b, 714c and have relative dimensions of 1L, 1L and 2L, respectively. Moreover, the magnets 714a, 714b, 714c can be configured such that their respective magnetic poles are aligned according to a second polarity mode {P2, PI, P2}, the second polarity mode and the first polarity mode {P1, P2, P1 } opposite (or complementary). With respect to the encoded magnetic structure, the magnets 714a, 714b, 714c can be aligned according to the second encoded magnetic sequence {-1, +1, -1}, the second encoded magnetic sequence and the first encoded The magnetic sequence { + 1, -1, +1} is opposite or complementary. The asymmetrical relationship between magnets 712a, 712b, 712c and 714a, 714b, 714c provides a magnetic field that is asymmetric with respect to centerline 716. 11A and 11B also show a particular embodiment of an accessory attachment feature 800 that can correspond to element 202 shown in Figures 6 and 7 A-7C. Magnetic component 802 can include a number of magnetic components. The magnetic elements can be configured in such a manner that the combined magnetic field matches the magnetic field of the magnetic component 702. The magnetic assembly 802 can include magnets 802a, 802b, 802c, each of which is substantially the same size as the corresponding magnets 712a, 712b, 712c of the magnetic assembly 702. However, in order to maximize the net magnetic attraction Fnet and drive the magnetic interaction between the magnetic fields to a desired balance, the magnets 802a, 802b, 802c are aligned according to the second polarity pattern {P2, PI, P2}. The magnetic assembly 802 can also include magnets 804a, 804b, 804c, each of which is substantially the same size as the corresponding magnets 714a, 714b, 714c. Again, in order to maintain the overall goal of magnetic interaction between the magnetic fields balanced in the desired device configuration, the magnets 804a, 804b, 804c can be aligned according to the first polarity pattern {PI, P2, P1}. FIG. 1B shows that the device attachment feature 700 is in this active state due to the magnetic interaction between the magnetic components 702 and 822. In particular, because the configuration of the magnetic elements of the device attachment feature configuration 700 is "matched" to the configuration of the magnetic elements of the accessory attachment feature configuration 800, the magnetic interaction between the magnetic fields can cause the magnetic assembly 702 to never function. The state (ie, X = 0) moves to the active state (ie, x = x〇). Figure 12 illustrates a series of relative displacement positions of the magnetic structure of the magnetic assembly 702 and one of the complementary magnetic structures of the magnetic assembly 822. Magnetic component 702 is encoded with an encoded sequence { + 2, -1, +1, -1, +1, -2}. Magnetic component 802 is encoded with an encoded sequence {-2, +1, -1, +1, -1, +2}. For this example, the magnets may have the same or substantially the same magnetic field strength (or amplitude). For this example, the magnetic field strength is provided as a unit (where A = phase absorption, R = phase exclusion, A = -R, A = 1, R = -l) » In this example, magnetic components 702 and 802 are each moved a length of "1 L" relative to each other (it should be noted that relative to the encoded magnetic The centerline of the sequence, 7 1 6 asymmetry, allows the result of shifting to the left to mirror the result of the shift to the right, so only the shift to the right is shown). For each opposing pair, the number of repulsive magnets plus the number of attracting magnets is calculated, and each alignment has a total force based on a magnetic function -43-M430792, which is based on the total force. The magnetic field strength of these magnets is based on. In other words, the total magnetic force between the first and second magnet structures is each magnet that interacts with the corresponding magnet directly in the opposite magnet structure at each magnet position from left to right along the structure. Or the sum of the individual forces of the magnet pair is determined. When only one magnet is present, the corresponding magnet is 〇 and the force is 〇. When two magnets are present, the force of each unit magnet is R (same pole) or A (opposite pole). The total magnetic force of each graph can be calculated and displayed along with the relative shift 每一 of each. Therefore, using a specific encoded magnetic sequence { + 2, -1, +1, -1, +1, -2}, the range of variation can be obtained from -3 (ie, 3R) to + 8 (ie, +8A). The net magnetic attraction Fnet, where the peaks occur when the magnetic components 702 and 822 are aligned such that their respective codes are also aligned. It should be noted that the net magnetic attraction from the peak varies between -3 and +4. Thus, the net magnetic attraction can cause the magnetic components 702 to substantially repel each other unless they are aligned such that each of their magnets is associated with a complementary magnet (ie, the south pole of one magnet and the other magnet) The North Pole is aligned, or vice versa). In other words, the magnetic components 702 and 802 are highly correlated when they are aligned such that they are substantially opposite each other. It should be noted that when the magnetic components 702 and 802 are 180 degrees out of phase (i.e., similar to head and tail misalignment, also referred to as upside down), the resulting net magnetic force may be 8R. Therefore, it is highly unlikely that the devices magnetically attached to each other by using the magnetic members 702 and 802 are attached upside down. Figure 13 shows a graph of two functions Fnet(L). The function Fnet(L) describes the net M430792 magnetic FNET as a function of the displacement displacement (L) of the encoded magnet structure in the magnetic assembly 702 and the magnetic assembly 802 shown in FIG. It should be noted that in the magnetic assemblies 702 and 802, the encoded magnet structures provide a symmetric nature with respect to the centerline 716 that the function FNET(L) is asymmetrical with respect to the centerline 716. In this manner, the results of Figure 12 can be drawn to the right of center line 7 16 and reflected relative to centerline 7 16 to be positioned to the left of graph 9000. As shown in Figure 13, the function FNET(L) has a global maximum when the magnetic components 702 and 802 are associated with each other at a position corresponding to the centerline 716. In other words, when all of the magnetic elements having the opposite magnetic poles in the magnetic components 702 and 802 are aligned with each other, the function FNET (L = 0) reaches a maximum 値 (β 卩, 8A). The result of any other configuration (i.e., the function FNET) is that the net magnetic force FNET is less than the global maximum 値 (8A). However, it should be further noted that the function FNET(L) has at least two local maximum chirps (i.e., the function FNET (L = ±3)) which allows for a weak attachment between the magnetic components 702 and 802. However, a strong durable attachment will only occur when the device magnetic attachment feature 700 associated with the magnetic assembly 702 is properly activated. Therefore, by establishing the activation force FACT that satisfies the equation (8), a "false activation" of the device magnetic attachment feature 700 or a weak adhesion between the magnetic device 702 and the 802 can be avoided. .

Fnet(L =局部最大値)$ FactS Fnet(L =全域最大値)式(8)。 應指出的是,該激活力FACT與式(6)的保持力Fretain有 關。以此方式,考慮到函數FNET(L),式(6)及式(8)可被用 -45- M430792 來決定彈簧常數k的一適合的數値》 圖14及15顯示磁性元件可被除直地且水平地配置的 其它實施例。此外,該等磁性元件的大小可被作成其磁極 亦水平地及垂直地延伸。例如,配置1 000顯示兩列磁性 元件’其中每一磁性元件的高度Η係延伸在垂直方向 上。在所示的配置中,每一被垂直地設置的磁性元件具有 相同的磁極其形成等效的磁性結構1002。換言之,配置 1000及配置1002兩者都可被特徵爲具有經過編碼的磁性 序歹 IJ { + 2,-2,+2,-2,+2,-2}° 圖15顯示依據被描述的實施例而被建構成二維度的 經過編碼的磁性序列1 004的磁性陣列的頂視圖。該二維 度的經過編碼的磁性序列1004可被用來將該結合的磁場 延伸於一伸展在X及y方向上的整個區域上。此一延展區 域可產生磁_通量的增加及淨磁吸力同量的(commensurate) 增加。除了提供一改善的磁性附著之外,該二維度的經過 編碼的磁性序列1004可近似(approximate)非整數値的磁 特性,譬如磁強度。例如,藉由該磁性配置1004,各式 構件的磁場可結合以近似該經過編碼的磁性序列{ + 1 .5, -1.5,+1.5,-1.5,+1.5,-1.5}。又,該二維度的經過編 碼的磁性序列1 〇〇4除了水平對準之外還有助於提供垂直 對準。 關於此討論的剩餘部分,配件裝置200的各式實施例 將被討論。 在一實施例中,配件裝置2 00可包括多個保護元件其 M430792 可被用來保護該電子裝置100的某些部分。例如,配件裝 置200可以是一保護蓋的形式。該保護蓋可包括一摺片 (flap)其樞軸地連接至一鉸鏈組件。該鉸鏈組件接著可藉 由配件附著特徵構造202而被耦接至該電子裝置100。以 此方式,該摺片部分可被用作爲一保護蓋以保護該電子裝 置100的一些部分,譬如顯示器。該摺片可用各式材料來 形成,譬如像是塑膠、布料、等等。該摺片可以一種該摺 片的一區段可被掀起來以露出該顯示器的對應部分的方式 予以區段化。該摺片亦可包括一功能性元件其可與該電子 裝置1 00內的一對應的功能性元件合作。以此方式,操縱 該摺片可造成改變該電子裝置100的操作的結果。 該摺片可包括磁性材料其可被用來根據例如霍耳效應 來激活該電子裝置100內的一磁性敏感電路。該磁性敏感 電路可藉由產生一訊號來回應,該訊號接著可被用來改變 該電子裝置100的操作狀態。因爲該保護蓋無需緊固件即 可輕易地直接附著至平板裝置的外殼,所以該保護蓋可實 質地順著該電子裝置100的形狀。以此方式,該保護蓋將 不會減損或以其它方式妨礙該電子裝置100的外觀及質 感。 在一實施例中,該配件裝置2 00可被用來強化該電子 裝置100的整體功能性。例如,該配件裝置200可被建構 來當作一懸掛設備般地作用。當磁性地附著至電子裝置 100時,配件裝置200可被用來懸掛該電子裝置100。以 此方式,電子裝置100可被用當作一用來呈現視覺內容 -47- M430792 (譬如藝術、電影、照片、等等)的顯示器。作爲一懸掛設 備,該配件裝置200可被用來將該電子裝置100懸掛於一 牆壁或屋頂上。該電子裝置100可單純地藉由施加一足以 克服該淨磁吸力FNET的釋開力量而被取下。該配件裝置 200可被留在原處且可在稍後被用來重新附著該電子裝置 1 〇〇(或另一裝置)。 在一實施例中,該配件裝置2 00亦可以是一用來讓本 身無法磁性地附著至該電子裝置100的物件附著至電子裝 置的固持機構的形式。例如,配件裝置200可被建構來攜 載一電筆(stylus)或其它輸入裝置。該電筆可被用來提供 輸入至該電子裝置100。在一些例子中,該配件裝置200 可提供一訊號至該電子裝置100,該訊號指出該電筆的存 在。該訊號可造成該電子裝置100進入例如一電筆辨識狀 態。詳言之,當該配件裝置200被磁性地附著至電子裝置 100時,電子裝置100可激活;一電筆輸入狀態以辨識電筆 類型的輸入。當該配件裝置200被移走時,電子裝置100 可停止該電筆輸入狀態。以此方式,該電筆在需要時可以 很方便地附著至該電子裝置100或從電子裝至1〇〇取下。 配件裝置200可以是一可被用來強化該電子裝置100 的功能性的支撐件的形式。例如,該配件裝置200可被建 構顯示器座台般地作用,該電子裝置100的顯示器在該配 件裝置上可以一舒適的觀看角度,譬如75°,來觀看。換 言之,當被放置在一水平的表面(譬如,一桌子或書桌)上 時,該配件裝置200可用一種呈現於該顯示器的視覺內容 M430792 能夠以約75°的視角加以觀看的方式來支撐該該電子裝置 100° • 該配件裝置200亦可以是一種用來加強該電子裝置 . 100在鍵盤狀態時的功能性的支撐件形式。在鍵盤狀態 時,該配件裝置2 00可被用來以符合人體工學的角度呈現 一觸碰鍵盤表面。以此方式,輸入觸碰事件可以在一不會 讓使用者的手腕、手、手臂等等過度負擔的角度下來實施 A (例如對一虛擬鍵盤實施)。Fnet (L = local maximum 値) $ FactS Fnet (L = global maximum 値) equation (8). It should be noted that the activation force FACT is related to the retention force Fretain of the equation (6). In this way, considering the function FNET(L), Equations (6) and (8) can be used to determine a suitable number of spring constants k using -45-M430792. Figures 14 and 15 show that the magnetic elements can be removed. Other embodiments that are configured straight and horizontally. Moreover, the magnetic elements can be sized such that their magnetic poles also extend horizontally and vertically. For example, configuration 1 000 shows two columns of magnetic elements 'the height of each of the magnetic elements extends in the vertical direction. In the configuration shown, each of the vertically disposed magnetic elements has the same magnetic polarity to form an equivalent magnetic structure 1002. In other words, both configuration 1000 and configuration 1002 can be characterized as having encoded magnetic sequences 歹IJ { + 2, -2, +2, -2, +2, -2}°. Figure 15 shows the implementation in accordance with the description. A top view of a magnetic array of encoded magnetic sequence 1 004 that is constructed to form a two-dimensional image. The two-dimensional encoded magnetic sequence 1004 can be used to extend the combined magnetic field over an entire area extending in the X and y directions. This extended region produces an increase in magnetic flux and a net increase in the net magnetic attraction. In addition to providing an improved magnetic attachment, the two-dimensional encoded magnetic sequence 1004 can approximate non-integer magnetic properties, such as magnetic strength. For example, with the magnetic configuration 1004, the magnetic fields of the various components can be combined to approximate the encoded magnetic sequence { + 1.5 , -1.5, +1.5, -1.5, +1.5, -1.5}. Again, the two-dimensional coded magnetic sequence 1 〇〇 4 helps provide vertical alignment in addition to horizontal alignment. With regard to the remainder of this discussion, various embodiments of accessory device 200 will be discussed. In an embodiment, the accessory device 200 can include a plurality of protective components such that the M430792 can be used to protect portions of the electronic device 100. For example, accessory device 200 can be in the form of a protective cover. The protective cover can include a flap that is pivotally coupled to a hinge assembly. The hinge assembly can then be coupled to the electronic device 100 by the accessory attachment feature 202. In this manner, the flap portion can be used as a protective cover to protect portions of the electronic device 100, such as a display. The flaps can be formed from a variety of materials such as plastic, cloth, and the like. The flap may be segmented in such a manner that a section of the flap can be picked up to reveal a corresponding portion of the display. The flap may also include a functional component that cooperates with a corresponding functional component within the electronic device 100. In this manner, manipulating the flap can result in a change in the operation of the electronic device 100. The flap may comprise a magnetic material that can be used to activate a magnetically sensitive circuit within the electronic device 100 in accordance with, for example, the Hall effect. The magnetic sensitive circuit can be responsive by generating a signal which can then be used to change the operational state of the electronic device 100. Since the protective cover can be easily attached directly to the outer casing of the tablet device without a fastener, the protective cover can substantially follow the shape of the electronic device 100. In this manner, the protective cover will not detract or otherwise interfere with the appearance and texture of the electronic device 100. In an embodiment, the accessory device 200 can be used to enhance the overall functionality of the electronic device 100. For example, the accessory device 200 can be constructed to function as a suspension device. When magnetically attached to the electronic device 100, the accessory device 200 can be used to suspend the electronic device 100. In this manner, electronic device 100 can be used as a display for presenting visual content -47-M430792 (e.g., art, movies, photos, etc.). As a suspension device, the accessory device 200 can be used to hang the electronic device 100 on a wall or roof. The electronic device 100 can be removed simply by applying a release force sufficient to overcome the net magnetic attraction FNET. The accessory device 200 can be left in place and can be used later to reattach the electronic device 1 (or another device). In one embodiment, the accessory device 200 can also be in the form of a retention mechanism for attaching an object that is not magnetically attached to the electronic device 100 to the electronic device. For example, accessory device 200 can be constructed to carry a stylus or other input device. The stylus can be used to provide input to the electronic device 100. In some examples, the accessory device 200 can provide a signal to the electronic device 100 indicating the presence of the stylus. The signal can cause the electronic device 100 to enter, for example, a pen recognition state. In detail, when the accessory device 200 is magnetically attached to the electronic device 100, the electronic device 100 can be activated; an electric pen input state to recognize the input of the electric pen type. When the accessory device 200 is removed, the electronic device 100 can stop the electric pen input state. In this way, the stylus can be easily attached to or removed from the electronic device 100 when needed. Accessory device 200 can be in the form of a support that can be used to enhance the functionality of the electronic device 100. For example, the accessory device 200 can be configured to function as a display stand on which the display of the electronic device 100 can be viewed at a comfortable viewing angle, such as 75°. In other words, when placed on a horizontal surface (such as a table or desk), the accessory device 200 can support the visual content M430792 presented on the display at a viewing angle of about 75°. Electronic device 100° • The accessory device 200 can also be in the form of a support for enhancing the functionality of the electronic device 100 in the state of the keyboard. In the keyboard state, the accessory device 200 can be used to present a touch of the keyboard surface at an ergonomic perspective. In this manner, the input touch event can be implemented A (e.g., for a virtual keyboard) at an angle that does not burden the user's wrists, hands, arms, and the like.

W 此討論的剩餘部分將描述可使用該磁性附著系統的裝 置的特定實施例。詳言之,圖16A及16B以立體頂視圖 的方式顯示以平板裝置1100形式呈現的電子裝置1〇〇且 該配件裝置200係以蓋子組件1200來呈現。這些元件大 體上對應於上文中提到的任何一者。詳言之,圖16A及 16B顯示平板裝置1100與蓋子組件1 200在打開形態時的 立體圖。例如,圖16A顯示包括在該平板裝置1100內的 φ 裝置附著特徵構造108及其與該平板裝置1100的關係。 另一方面,圖16B則是圖1 6A轉180°的圖式以提供附著 特徵構造202及其與該蓋子組件1 200的關係的第二視 圖。 該平板裝置1100可以是一平板運算裝置的形式,譬 如像是由設在美國加州Cupertino市的Apple公司所製造 的iPAD™。現參考圖16A,平板裝置 1100可包括外殼 1102其可包圍並支撐該裝置附著特徵構造108。爲了不與 該裝置附著特徵構造108所產生的磁場相干擾,至少該外 -49- M430792 殻1102靠近該裝置附著特徵構造108的部分可用任何數 目的非磁性材料(譬如像是,塑膠或非磁性金屬’如鋁)來 形成。外殼1102亦可包圍及支撐內部的各式結構構件及 電子構件(包括積體電路晶片及其它電路)以提供該平板裝 置1100的運送操作。外殼1102可包括用來放置該等內部 構件的開口 1 1 04且可被作成能夠容納一顯示器組件或適 合經由例如一顯示器提供使用者視覺內容的系統的大小。 在一些例子中,該顯示器組件可包括觸碰敏感能力以提供 使用者能夠使用觸碰輸入來提供觸覺(tactile)輸入至該平 板裝置1100的能力。該顯示器組件可用數個層來形成, 其包括用聚碳酸酯或其它適合的塑膠或經過高度拋光的玻 璃製成之透明的覆蓋玻璃1106形式的最上層。藉由使用 經過高度拋光的玻璃,該覆蓋玻璃1106可以是實質塡滿 該開口 1104的覆蓋玻璃1106的形式。 雖然未示出,但在該覆蓋玻之璃1106底下的該顯示 器組件可被用來藉由使用任何適合的顯示技術,譬如 LCD、LED、OLED、電子或電子墨水等等,來顯示影像。 該顯示器組件可藉由使用各種機構而被放置並固定在該凹 穴內。在一實施例中,該顯示組件係被壓嵌至該凹穴內。 該顯示器組件可被設置成與外殼的鄰接部分齊平。以此方 式,該顯示器可呈現的視覺內容包括視覺(visual)、靜態 影像,以及圖像(icons),譬如可提供資訊給使用者(如, 文字、物件、圖形)並接受使用者提供的輸入的圖形使用 者界面(GUI)。在一些例子中,被顯示的圖像可被使用者 M430792 移動至該顯示器上一更爲方便的位置。 在一些實施例中,一顯示器遮罩可被施加至該覆蓋玻 璃1106或結合於該覆蓋玻璃1106內或底下。該顯示器遮 罩可被用來強調該顯示器被用來呈現視覺內容的一未被遮 蓋的部分且可被用來讓該裝置附著特徵構造108及該固定 附著特徵構造11〇不明顯。該平板裝置1100可包括各式 的埠口其可被用來將資訊傳送於該平板裝置1100與外部 環境之間。詳言之,資料埠1108可方便資料及電路的傳 輸,而揚聲器1110可被用來輸出音訊內容。主頁按鈕 (home button)1112可被用來提供輸入訊號,該輸入訊號 可被該平板裝置11〇〇內的處理器使用。該處理器可使用 來自該主頁按鈕1112的訊號以改變該平板裝置1100的操 作狀態。例如,主頁按鈕111 2可被用來重設該顯示裝置 組件所呈現之目前的頁面。 在一實施例中,該配件裝置 200可以是蓋子組件 1 200的形式。該蓋子組件1 200具有可以添加至該平板裝 置1100的整體外觀及質感上之與該平板裝置1100的外觀 及質感相匹配的外觀與質感。該蓋子組件1 200被示於圖 16A及16B中,其以一打開的形態被附著至該平板裝置 1100,圖中該覆蓋玻璃1106可被完整地看到。該蓋子組 件1 200可包括摺片1202。在一實施例中,該摺片1202 可具有與覆蓋玻璃1106對應的大小與形狀。該摺片1202 可藉由鉸鏈組件(未示出)而被樞軸地連接至該配件附著特 徵構造2〇2。介於該附著特徵構造202與該裝置附著特徵 -51 - M430792 構造108之間的磁性附著力可將該蓋子組件12〇〇與該平 板裝置1100維持在該摺片1 202與該覆蓋玻璃1106面對 面的適當的方位及位置。適當方位係指該蓋子組件1200 只能以該摺片1 202與該覆蓋玻璃11〇6以匹配嚙合式對準 的方式適當地附著至平板裝置1100。該覆蓋玻璃1106與 該摺片1 202間的匹配嚙合係指當該摺片1 202被放置成如 圖17A所示與該覆蓋玻璃1106接觸時,該摺片1 202實 質地覆蓋所有的覆蓋玻璃1106。 圖17A及17B顯示該蓋子組件1200與該平板裝置 1100彼此磁性地附著在一起。圖17A顯示該覆蓋玻璃 1106完全被該摺片1 202覆蓋且與該摺片1 202接觸的閉 合形態。該蓋子組件1200可繞著該鉸鏈組件1204從圖 1 7A的閉合狀態樞轉至圖1 7B的打開狀態。在該閉合形態 時,該蓋子組件1200的內層1206可以與該覆蓋玻璃 1 106接觸。在一實施例中,該內層1 206可用能夠被動地 清潔該覆蓋玻璃1106的材料來形成。該覆蓋玻璃1106的 內層1206的被動式清潔可由該內層1206與該覆蓋玻璃 1106接觸的部分的運動來達成。在一特定的實施例中, 該內層12 06可用一微型纖維材料製成。 爲了要從該閉合的形態轉變至該打開的形態,釋開力 Frelease可被施加至該摺片1202。該釋開力FreUase可克服 在該摺片1 202內的附著特徵構造216與在該平板裝置 1100內的附著特徵構造110之間的磁吸力。因此,蓋子 組件1200可被固定至該平板裝置1 100直到該Frelease被 M430792 施加至該摺片1202爲止。以此方式,摺片1202可被用來 保護該覆蓋玻璃1106 »例如,該蓋子組件1200可被磁性 * 地附著至該平板裝置1100。然後摺片1202可被放零在該 . 複蓋玻璃1106上且藉由附著特徵構造110及216間的磁 性相互作用而被磁性地固定至該覆蓋玻璃1106。摺片 1 202可藉由直接對該摺片1 202施加該Frelease而從該覆蓋 玻璃1106上被拆離。該Frelease可克服附著特徵構造110 φ 及216之間的磁吸力。因此,摺片1 202可毫無阻礙地從 該覆蓋玻璃1106被拆下。 爲了要在該摺片1 202與該附著特徵構造110之間保 持良好的磁性附著,該摺片1202可包括數個磁性元件。 在該摺片1 202中的一些磁性元件可與該附著特徵構造 110內對應的磁性元件相互作用。產生在該等磁性元件之 間的淨磁吸力強大到足以防止該摺片1 202在正常的搬運 期間從該覆蓋玻璃1106上意外地鬆脫。然而,該淨磁吸 力可被該F r e 1 e a s e克服。 圖18顯示該蓋子組件1200以片段式蓋子組件1300 呈現的一特定實施例的頂視圖。該片段式蓋子組件1 3 00 可包括本體13〇2。該本體1 302可具有一對應於該平板裝 置1100的覆蓋玻璃1106的尺寸及形狀。該本體1 302可 用單件式可摺疊的或易曲摺的(pliable)的材料來製造。該 本體1 302亦可被分割成片段,片段與片段彼此間被一摺 疊區分開。以此方式,該等片段可在該等摺疊區處相對於 彼此被摺疊。在一實施例中,該本體1302可由多層材料 -53- M430792 層形成’該等材料層係彼此附著以形成一層疊結構 (laminate structure)。每一材料層可以是單一材料件的形 式’其具有與該本體1302相符合的大小及形狀。每一材 料層亦可具有只對應於該本體1302的一部分的大小及形 狀。例如,一與一片段的大小及形狀大致相同的硬質或半 硬質材料層可被附著至該片段或以其它方式與該片段相關 聯。在另一例子中’一具有與該本體1302的大小及形狀 相對應的硬質或半硬質材料層可被用來提供該片段式蓋子 組件1 300 —彈性的基礎。應指出的是,該等材料層每一 者都可用具有所想要的特性的材料來形成《•例如,該片段 式蓋子組件1300的一與易碎的表面(譬如,玻璃)接觸的 層可用不會損傷或以其它方式傷害該易碎的表面的軟質材 料來形成。在另一實施例中,一像是微型纖維的材料可被 使用,其可被動地清潔該易碎的表面。在另一方面,一外 露於外部環境中的材料層可用更粗糙且更耐用的材料,譬 如像是塑膠或皮革,形成》 在一特定的實施例中,該片段式本體13 02可被分割 成數個片段1 304-1 3 1 0,其被薄且可摺疊的部分1312隔 開。該等片段1 304-1 3 10的每一者可包括一或多個設置於 其內的插入件。舉例而言,該等片段可包括一袋形區,該 等片段可被設置於該等袋形區內或者該等插入件可被埋設 在該等片段內(如,插入件模製)。如果是使用袋形區的 話,則該袋形區可具有能夠容納對應的插入件的大小及形 狀。該等插入件可具有各式形狀,但最典型的是被作成與 -54- M430792 該片段式本體1302的整體外觀相符的形狀(如,矩形)》 該等插入件可被用來提供結構支撐給該片段式本體 • 1 302。亦即,該等插入件可提供剛性給該蓋子組件。在一 . 些例子中,該等插入件可被稱爲加強件。因此,該蓋子組 件是相對堅硬的,但沿著該等摺疊區的部份除外,該等摺 疊區是較薄的且沒有包括該等插入件(以容許摺疊),讓該 片段式蓋子組件1300更耐用及更容易操作。在一實施例 0 中,片段1 304,1 306,及1310相對於片段1 308在尺寸 上的比例可以是約0.72比1,這表示片段1304,1306及 1310的寬度約爲片段1308的寬度的72%。以此方式,一 預有適當角度的三角形可被形成(即,用於顯示器座的約 75°及用於鍵盤座的約1Γ,這將於下文中討論)。 片段13 06,1308,及1310可分別包括插入件1314, 1 3 1 6,及1 3 1 8 (以虛線形式顯示)。插入件1 3 1 4-1 3 1 8可用 硬質的材料或可增加本體13 02的彈性的半硬質的材料來 φ 形成。可被使用的材料的例子包括塑膠、玻璃纖維、碳纖 維組成物、金屬、及類此者。片段1304可包括插入件 1 3 20其亦是用彈性材料(譬如,塑膠)製成但被設置來容納 該等磁性元件1 322,該等磁性元件的一部分可與該平板 裝置1100內的磁性元件,更明確地爲附著特徵構造 1 1 〇,相互作用。 因爲該片段式本體1302能夠摺疊的能力,更明確地 是該等不同的片段可相對於彼此摺疊的能力,所以大多數 的磁性元件1322可被用來與埋設在插入件1318內的磁性 -55- M430792 作用插入件1324磁性地相互作用。藉由將該作用插入件 1324與該等磁性元件1322磁性地結合起來,不同的支撐 結構可被形成,這些支撐結構的一部分的形狀可以是三角 形。該等三角形支撐結構在該平板裝置1100的使用時可 發揮輔助作用。例如,一三角形支撐結構可被用來以一種 視覺內容可用與水平夾約75°之所想要的視角呈現的方式 來支撐該平板裝置11〇〇。然而,爲了要能夠適當地摺疊 該片段式蓋子1300,該片段1308可被作成比片段13 04、 1 3 06及1310(它們大小大致相同)稍大的大小。以此方 式,該等片段可形成一具有兩個等邊及一較長的第三邊的 三角形,該三角形具有一約7 5°的內角。 形成至少一三角形支撐結構的方法可包括片段 13〇4’其以一種埋設在插入件1 320內的大多數磁性元件 1322磁性地吸引該磁性作用的插入件1324的方式相對於 片段1306-1310摺疊。以此方式,片段1304及片段1310 可被磁性地結合在一起以形成一具有適當的尺度之三角形 支撑結構。該三角形支擦結構可被用作爲一台座,該平板 裝置1100可被放置於其上致使視覺內容可以約75。的角度 被呈現。在另—例子中’該片段式蓋子13〇〇可被摺疊以 形成一可被用作爲鍵盤支撐件的三角形支撐結構。該片段 式蓋子13〇〇亦可被摺疊以形成一可被用來將該平板裝置 1100吊掛於—水平支撐物(譬如,天花板)或—垂直支撐物 (譬如’牆壁)上的三角形支撐結構。 該蓋子組件13 00可藉由一鉸鏈組件而樞軸地附著至 -56- M430792 配件附著特徵構造2 02。該鉸鏈組件可提供一或多個樞銷 用以在該蓋子組件透過磁鐵被附著至該裝置的同時允許該 蓋子摺疊於該蓋子上。在所示的實施例中,該鉸鏈組件可 包括第一鉸鏈部分(亦被稱爲第一端凸部)13 28及一被設置 成與該第一端凸部相反的第二鉸鏈部分(或第二端凸 部)1 3 3 0。該第一端凸部1 3 28可藉由一被包含在該片段式 本體1 302的管子部分內的連接桿1 3 3 2(以虛線形式顯示) 而被剛性地連接至第二端凸部1330。該連接桿1332的縱 軸線可如一樞轉軸線1333般地作用,該片段式本體可繞 著該縱軸線相對於該鉸鏈組件樞轉。該連接桿1332可用 強壯的足以剛性地支撐該蓋子組件1 300以及任何磁性地 附著至該磁性附著構造202的物件,譬如該平板裝置 1100,的金屬或塑膠來製造。 爲了要防止金屬與金屬接觸,該第一端凸部1 328及 第二端凸部1330每一者可分別具有保護層1336及1338 附著於其上。保護層(亦被稱爲緩衝件)1336及1338可防 止第一端凸部1 32 8及第二端凸部1 3 3 0與該外殼1102直 接接觸。這在第一端凸部1328及第二端凸部1330與該外 殼1102都是用金屬製造時是特別重要。緩衝件1336及 1338的存在可防止端凸部與外殼11〇2之間屬與金屬的接 觸’藉以消除在接觸點實質磨損及撕裂(這會降低該平板 裝置1100的整體外觀與質感)的機會。 爲了要保持它們的保護品質,緩衝件1336及1338可 用彈性的、耐用的且可防止該平板裝置1100的外表面的 -57- M430792 損傷的材料來製造。這特別重要,因爲良好的磁性附著需 要的公差很緊且在該平板裝置1100的使用壽命期間預期 的附著循環的次數很大。因此,緩衝件1336及1338可用 軟質塑膠、布料或紙來製造,其可藉由使用任何適合的黏 劑而被附著至該等端凸部上。應指出的是,該等緩衝件在 有需要時可被去除並用新的緩衝件來替換。 該第一端凸部13 28及第二端凸部1330可藉由鉸鏈跨 距件1 340而被磁性地連接至該電子裝置,該鉸鏈跨距件 1 3 40被建構來相對於該等端凸部樞轉。該樞轉可使用鉸 鏈支柱13 42(它的一部分可被露出來)來達成。鉸鏈支柱 1 342可將該鉸鏈跨距件1 340可轉動地固定至第一端凸部 1328及第二端凸部1330。鉸鏈跨距件1340可包括磁性元 件。該等磁性元件可被配置來將該鉸鏈跨距件1340磁性 地附著至一磁性附著特徵構造,該磁性附著特徵構造具有 該電子裝置內的磁性元件的匹配配置。爲了要將將該等磁 性元件固定在該鉸鏈跨距件1 340內的定位上,該等鉸鏈 支柱1 342可被用來將位於該鉸鏈跨距件1 340兩端的磁性 元件予以固定,降低該鉸鏈跨距件1 340內的磁性元件四 處移動而擾亂該鉸鏈跨距件1 340與該電子裝置內的磁性 附著特徵構造間的磁性附著的可能性。 爲了要確保在該鉸鏈跨距件1 340內的磁性元件與該 電子裝置內的對應磁性元件之間沒有干擾,該鉸鏈跨距件 1 3 40可用非磁性作用的材料,譬如塑膠,或非磁金屬, 譬如鋁,來製造。當該鉸鏈跨距件1 340是用非磁性作用 M430792 的金屬,譬如像是鋁,來製造時,該鉸鏈跨距件1 340與 該電子裝置1100的外殻1102之間的金屬對金屬的接觸可 • 藉由使用該保護層1344來加以防止。當該鉸鏈跨距件 . 1 340及該電子裝置1 100彼此磁性地附著時,保護層1344 可被施用在該鉸鏈跨距件1 340面向該外殼1102的表面 上。該保護層1344(亦被稱爲標籤1 344)可用許多不會損 傷該外殼1102的表面的材料來製造。這些材料可包括, _ 例如,紙、布料、塑膠等等。The remainder of this discussion will describe a particular embodiment of a device that can use the magnetic attachment system. In particular, Figures 16A and 16B show the electronic device 1 presented in the form of a tablet device 1100 in a top perspective view and the accessory device 200 is presented in a lid assembly 1200. These elements generally correspond to any of the above mentioned. In particular, Figures 16A and 16B show perspective views of the tablet unit 1100 and the lid assembly 1 200 in an open configuration. For example, Figure 16A shows a φ device attachment feature 108 included in the tablet device 1100 and its relationship to the tablet device 1100. On the other hand, Fig. 16B is a view of Fig. 16A rotated by 180 to provide an attachment feature 202 and a second view thereof in relation to the cover assembly 1200. The tablet device 1100 may be in the form of a tablet computing device such as the iPADTM manufactured by Apple Inc. of Cupertino, California. Referring now to Figure 16A, tablet device 1100 can include a housing 1102 that can enclose and support the device attachment feature 108. In order not to interfere with the magnetic field generated by the device attachment feature 108, at least the portion of the outer-49-M430792 case 1102 adjacent to the device attachment feature 108 can be any number of non-magnetic materials (eg, plastic or non-magnetic). A metal such as aluminum is formed. The housing 1102 can also surround and support various internal structural members and electronic components (including integrated circuit chips and other circuitry) to provide transport operations for the tablet device 1100. The housing 1102 can include an opening 1 104 for placing the internal components and can be sized to accommodate a display assembly or a system adapted to provide visual content to the user via, for example, a display. In some examples, the display assembly can include touch sensitive capabilities to provide the user with the ability to use tactile input to provide tactile input to the tablet device 1100. The display assembly can be formed in a number of layers comprising an uppermost layer in the form of a transparent cover glass 1106 made of polycarbonate or other suitable plastic or highly polished glass. By using highly polished glass, the cover glass 1106 can be in the form of a cover glass 1106 that substantially fills the opening 1104. Although not shown, the display assembly underneath the cover glass 1106 can be used to display images by using any suitable display technology, such as LCD, LED, OLED, electronic or electronic ink, and the like. The display assembly can be placed and secured within the recess by the use of various mechanisms. In an embodiment, the display assembly is press fit into the pocket. The display assembly can be placed flush with the abutment portion of the housing. In this manner, the visual content that the display can present includes visual, still images, and icons, such as providing information to the user (eg, text, objects, graphics) and accepting input provided by the user. Graphical user interface (GUI). In some examples, the displayed image can be moved by the user M430792 to a more convenient location on the display. In some embodiments, a display mask can be applied to or incorporated within the cover glass 1106. The display mask can be used to emphasize that the display is used to present an uncovered portion of the visual content and can be used to make the device attachment feature 108 and the fixed attachment feature configuration 11 inconspicuous. The tablet device 1100 can include a variety of ports that can be used to communicate information between the tablet device 1100 and the external environment. In particular, data 埠 1108 facilitates the transfer of data and circuitry, while speaker 1110 can be used to output audio content. A home button 1112 can be used to provide an input signal that can be used by a processor within the tablet device 11. The processor can use the signal from the home button 1112 to change the operational state of the tablet device 1100. For example, the home button 111 2 can be used to reset the current page presented by the display device component. In an embodiment, the accessory device 200 can be in the form of a cover assembly 1 200. The lid assembly 1 200 has an appearance and texture that can be added to the overall appearance and texture of the tablet device 1100 in accordance with the appearance and texture of the tablet device 1100. The lid assembly 1 200 is shown in Figures 16A and 16B and is attached to the tablet unit 1100 in an open configuration in which the cover glass 1106 can be viewed in its entirety. The cover assembly 1 200 can include a flap 1202. In an embodiment, the flap 1202 can have a size and shape corresponding to the cover glass 1106. The flap 1202 can be pivotally coupled to the fitting attachment feature formation 2〇2 by a hinge assembly (not shown). The magnetic adhesion between the attachment feature 202 and the device attachment feature -51 - M430792 configuration 108 maintains the lid assembly 12 and the tablet device 1100 in face of the flap 1 202 and the cover glass 1106. The proper orientation and location. Appropriate orientation means that the lid assembly 1200 can only be properly attached to the tablet device 1100 in a mating-aligned manner with the flap 1 202 and the cover glass 11〇6. The mating engagement between the cover glass 1106 and the flap 1 202 means that when the flap 1 202 is placed in contact with the cover glass 1106 as shown in Figure 17A, the flap 1 202 substantially covers all of the cover glass. 1106. 17A and 17B show that the lid assembly 1200 and the tablet device 1100 are magnetically attached to each other. Figure 17A shows the closed configuration in which the cover glass 1106 is completely covered by the flap 1 202 and in contact with the flap 1 202. The lid assembly 1200 is pivotable about the hinge assembly 1204 from the closed state of Figure 17A to the open state of Figure 17B. In the closed configuration, the inner layer 1206 of the lid assembly 1200 can be in contact with the cover glass 1 106. In an embodiment, the inner layer 1 206 can be formed from a material that is capable of passively cleaning the cover glass 1106. Passive cleaning of the inner layer 1206 of the cover glass 1106 can be achieved by movement of the portion of the inner layer 1206 that is in contact with the cover glass 1106. In a particular embodiment, the inner layer 206 can be formed from a microfiber material. In order to transition from the closed configuration to the open configuration, an release force Frelease can be applied to the flap 1202. The release force FreUase overcomes the magnetic attraction between the attachment feature 216 within the flap 1 202 and the attachment feature 110 within the tablet 1100. Thus, the lid assembly 1200 can be secured to the tablet device 1 100 until the Frelease is applied to the flap 1202 by the M430792. In this manner, the flap 1202 can be used to protect the cover glass 1106. For example, the lid assembly 1200 can be magnetically attached to the tablet device 1100. The flaps 1202 can then be placed on the cover glass 1106 and magnetically secured to the cover glass 1106 by magnetic interaction between the attachment features 110 and 216. The flap 1 202 can be detached from the cover glass 1106 by applying the Frelease directly to the flap 1 202. The Frelease overcomes the magnetic attraction between the attachment features 110 φ and 216. Therefore, the flap 1 202 can be detached from the cover glass 1106 without any hindrance. In order to maintain good magnetic attachment between the flap 1 202 and the attachment feature 110, the flap 1202 can include a plurality of magnetic elements. Some of the magnetic elements in the flap 1 202 can interact with corresponding magnetic elements within the attachment feature formation 110. The net magnetic attraction generated between the magnetic elements is strong enough to prevent the flap 1 202 from being accidentally released from the cover glass 1106 during normal handling. However, the net magnetic attraction can be overcome by the F r e 1 e a s e. FIG. 18 shows a top view of a particular embodiment of the lid assembly 1200 presented in a segmented lid assembly 1300. The segmented lid assembly 1 300 can include a body 13〇2. The body 1 302 can have a size and shape corresponding to the cover glass 1106 of the tablet device 1100. The body 1 302 can be fabricated from a single piece of foldable or pliable material. The body 1 302 can also be segmented into segments, the segments and segments being separated from one another by a fold. In this way, the segments can be folded relative to each other at the fold regions. In one embodiment, the body 1302 can be formed from a plurality of layers of material - 53 - M430792. The layers of material are attached to each other to form a laminate structure. Each layer of material may be in the form of a single piece of material' having a size and shape that conforms to the body 1302. Each material layer may also have a size and shape that corresponds only to a portion of the body 1302. For example, a layer of hard or semi-rigid material that is substantially the same size and shape as a segment can be attached to or otherwise associated with the segment. In another example, a layer of hard or semi-rigid material having a size and shape corresponding to the body 1302 can be used to provide the basis for the resilient lid assembly 1 300. It should be noted that each of the layers of material may be formed from a material having the desired characteristics. • For example, a layer of the segmented lid assembly 1300 that is in contact with a frangible surface (eg, glass) may be used. A soft material that does not damage or otherwise damage the fragile surface is formed. In another embodiment, a material such as a microfiber can be used that passively cleans the frangible surface. In another aspect, a layer of material exposed to the external environment can be formed from a coarser and more durable material, such as, for example, plastic or leather. In a particular embodiment, the segmented body 13 02 can be segmented into several Fragments 1 304-1 3 1 0 are separated by a thin, foldable portion 1312. Each of the segments 1 304-1 3 10 can include one or more inserts disposed therein. For example, the segments can include a pocket-shaped region that can be disposed within the pocket regions or the inserts can be embedded within the segments (e.g., insert molded). If a pocket is used, the pocket can have a size and shape that can accommodate a corresponding insert. The inserts can have a variety of shapes, but most typically are shaped to conform to the overall appearance of the segment body 1302 of the -54-M430792 (e.g., rectangular). The inserts can be used to provide structural support. Give the fragmented ontology • 1 302. That is, the inserts provide rigidity to the lid assembly. In some examples, the inserts may be referred to as stiffeners. Thus, the lid assembly is relatively rigid, except for portions along the fold regions that are relatively thin and do not include the inserts (to allow for folding), allowing the segmented lid assembly 1300 More durable and easier to operate. In an embodiment 0, the ratio of the segments 1 304, 1 306, and 1310 relative to the segment 1 308 may be about 0.72 to 1, indicating that the width of the segments 1304, 1306, and 1310 is about the width of the segment 1308. 72%. In this manner, a triangle with a suitable angle can be formed (i.e., about 75° for the display stand and about 1 用于 for the keyboard stand, as will be discussed below). Segments 13 06, 1308, and 1310 can include inserts 1314, 1 3 1 6, and 1 3 1 8 (shown in dashed lines), respectively. The insert 1 3 1 4-1 3 1 8 can be formed of a hard material or a semi-rigid material which increases the elasticity of the body 1300. Examples of materials that can be used include plastics, fiberglass, carbon fiber compositions, metals, and the like. The segment 1304 can include an insert 1 3 20 that is also made of an elastomeric material (eg, plastic) but is configured to receive the magnetic elements 1 322, a portion of which can be associated with a magnetic component within the tablet device 1100 , more specifically for the attachment features to construct 1 1 〇, interaction. Because of the ability of the segmented body 1302 to be folded, more specifically the ability of the different segments to fold relative to each other, most of the magnetic elements 1322 can be used with the magnetic-55 embedded in the insert 1318. - M430792 Acting insert 1324 magnetically interacts. By magnetically bonding the active insert 1324 to the magnetic elements 1322, different support structures can be formed, a portion of which can be triangular in shape. The triangular support structures can assist in the use of the tablet device 1100. For example, a triangular support structure can be used to support the tablet device 11 in a manner that visual content can be presented at a desired viewing angle of about 75 degrees from the horizontal clip. However, in order to be able to properly fold the segmented cover 1300, the segment 1308 can be made slightly larger than the segments 13 04, 1 3 06 and 1310 (which are approximately the same size). In this manner, the segments can form a triangle having two equilateral sides and a longer third side, the triangle having an internal angle of about 75°. The method of forming at least one triangular support structure can include a segment 13〇4' folded relative to the segment 1306-1310 in a manner that most of the magnetic elements 1322 embedded within the insert 1 320 magnetically attract the magnetically acting insert 1324. . In this manner, segment 1304 and segment 1310 can be magnetically bonded together to form a triangular support structure of appropriate dimensions. The triangular rubbing structure can be used as a pedestal on which the tablet device 1100 can be placed such that the visual content can be about 75. The angle is presented. In another example, the segmented lid 13 can be folded to form a triangular support structure that can be used as a keyboard support. The segmented lid 13 can also be folded to form a triangular support structure that can be used to hang the tablet device 1100 on a horizontal support (such as a ceiling) or a vertical support (such as a wall). . The lid assembly 13 00 can be pivotally attached to the -56-M430792 accessory attachment feature 202 by a hinge assembly. The hinge assembly can provide one or more pivot pins for allowing the cover to be folded over the cover while the cover assembly is attached to the device. In the illustrated embodiment, the hinge assembly can include a first hinge portion (also referred to as a first end projection) 13 28 and a second hinge portion disposed opposite the first end projection (or Second end projection) 1 3 3 0. The first end projection 1 3 28 can be rigidly coupled to the second end projection by a connecting rod 1 3 3 2 (shown in dashed lines) contained within the tube portion of the segment body 1 302 1330. The longitudinal axis of the connecting rod 1332 can function as a pivot axis 1333 about which the segment body can pivot relative to the hinge assembly. The connecting rod 1332 can be fabricated from a metal or plastic that is strong enough to rigidly support the lid assembly 1 300 and any articles that are magnetically attached to the magnetic attachment formation 202, such as the flat panel device 1100. In order to prevent metal from contacting the metal, the first end projection 1 328 and the second end projection 1330 may each have a protective layer 1336 and 1338 attached thereto. Protective layers (also referred to as bumpers) 1336 and 1338 prevent first end projections 1 32 8 and second end projections 1 3 3 0 from coming into direct contact with the outer casing 1102. This is particularly important when both the first end projection 1328 and the second end projection 1330 and the outer casing 1102 are made of metal. The presence of the cushioning members 1336 and 1338 prevents metal-to-metal contact between the end projections and the outer casing 11〇2 to eliminate substantial wear and tear at the contact points (which reduces the overall appearance and texture of the tablet device 1100). . In order to maintain their protective qualities, the cushioning members 1336 and 1338 can be made of a resilient, durable material that prevents damage to the -57-M430792 of the outer surface of the tablet device 1100. This is particularly important because the tolerances required for good magnetic attachment are tight and the number of attachment cycles expected during the life of the tablet unit 1100 is large. Thus, cushioning members 1336 and 1338 can be made of soft plastic, cloth or paper that can be attached to the end projections by the use of any suitable adhesive. It should be noted that the cushioning members can be removed and replaced with new cushioning members when needed. The first end protrusion 13 28 and the second end protrusion 1330 can be magnetically connected to the electronic device by the hinge span 1 340, and the hinge span 1 340 is constructed to be opposite to the end The convex part pivots. This pivoting can be achieved using hinge posts 13 42 (a portion of which can be exposed). The hinge strut 1 342 can rotatably secure the hinge span 1 340 to the first end projection 1328 and the second end projection 1330. The hinge span 1340 can include a magnetic element. The magnetic elements can be configured to magnetically attach the hinge span 1340 to a magnetic attachment feature configuration having a mating configuration of magnetic elements within the electronic device. In order to secure the magnetic elements in the position within the hinge span 1 340, the hinge struts 1 342 can be used to secure the magnetic elements at the ends of the hinge span 1 340, reducing the The magnetic elements within the hinge span 1 340 move around to disturb the possibility of magnetic attachment between the hinge span 1 340 and the magnetic attachment features within the electronic device. In order to ensure that there is no interference between the magnetic element within the hinge span 1 340 and the corresponding magnetic element within the electronic device, the hinge span 1 13 can be made of a non-magnetic material, such as plastic, or non-magnetic. Made of metal, such as aluminum. Metal-to-metal contact between the hinge span 1 340 and the outer casing 1102 of the electronic device 1100 when the hinge span 1 340 is fabricated from a metal such as aluminum that is non-magnetically acting M430792 Can be prevented by using the protective layer 1344. When the hinge span member 1 340 and the electronic device 1 100 are magnetically attached to each other, a protective layer 1344 can be applied to the surface of the hinge span member 1 340 facing the outer casing 1102. The protective layer 1344 (also referred to as label 1 344) can be fabricated from a number of materials that do not damage the surface of the outer casing 1102. These materials may include, for example, paper, cloth, plastic, and the like.

W 圖19Α及19Β顯示該鉸鏈跨距件1 340的兩個實施例 的細部。詳言之,圖19Α顯示鉸鏈跨距件的實施例 14 00,其中磁性鈍態的間隔件被用來分隔及固定該等磁性 元件。詳言之,該鉸鏈跨距件1400可包圍並支撐磁性元 件1402,該等磁性元件1402被磁性附著特徵構造202用 來將該片段式蓋子組件1 300磁性地附著至該平板裝置 1 1〇〇。該等磁性元件1402可被配置成一特定的組態,其 Φ 與該平板裝置110的該裝置附著特徵構造108內的對應磁 性元件相匹配。以此方式,該片段式蓋子組件1 3 00及該 平板裝置1100可精準地且可重複地彼此附著。 爲了要在一段長的時間期間內保持可重複且穩定的磁 性嚙合,該等磁性元件1 402可保持在穩定的組態。換言 之,在該鉸鏈跨距件1400內的該等磁性元件1402應相對 於在該平板裝置1100的磁性附著系統中的對應的磁性元 件保持在它們的相對位置及磁極一段長的時間。這在該蓋 子組件1 300及/或該平板裝置1100的預計使用壽命期間 -59- M430792 預期會有重複的附著循環時是特別重要的。 在此處’爲了確保在許多附著循環的整個過程中磁性 嚙合的完整性,該等磁性元件1402的組態可保持著相對 於彼此及相對於裝置附著特徵構造108內的對應磁性元件 被實質地固定。因此’爲了要確保該等磁性元件1 402的 實體佈局保持實質固定不動,塡充材料1404可被插入到 該鉸鏈跨距件1400內不同的磁性元件1402之間。塡充材 料1404可以是非磁性材料,例如塑膠。該塡充材料1404 可被作成能夠嵌設於磁性元件間的間隙空間內的形狀。以 此方式,磁性元件1402可保持在一固定且穩定的組態— 段很長的時間。 在另一方面,圖19B顯示該鉸鏈跨距件1340以鉸鏈 跨距件1410形式呈現的另一實施例,其利用實體相鄰的 磁性元件之間相互的磁吸力來將該等磁性元件固定於定位 上。以此方式,構成部件的數量可減少。再者,因爲該等 磁性元件1 402所佔的面積減少,所以對應的磁通量密度 可提高。然而,端塞1412可被用來將位在鉸鏈跨距件 1410的兩端的磁性元件固定。當位在該鉸鏈跨距件1410 兩端的磁性元件具有對準的磁極時,必需使用端塞1412 來克服淨磁互斥力。除了端塞1412之外,另一實施例可 提供設於中心的間隔件1 4 1 4。該設在中心的間隔件1 4 1 4 可用磁性鈍態材料製造且可被用來將該等磁性元件1402 固定在定位。 圖19C顯示當該片段式蓋子組件1 300被磁性地附著 M430792 至該平板裝置1100時,該鉸鏈跨距件1340形成該嚙合表 面的一部分的部分。詳言之,標籤1 344被顯示爲藉由使 ' 用黏劑(如,黏膠)而附著至該鉸鏈跨距件1 340。應指出的 是,該標籤1 3 44被設置成符合(conform)該外殼1 1 02之 形成該嚙合表面的一部分的部分的形狀。以此方式,相對 應的磁性元件間的分開距離可被最小化。 圖20A顯示磁性地附著至該平板裝置1100的片段式 φ 蓋子組件1 3 00的代表性側視圖。圖20B顯示沿著圖18的 線A-A所取之該片段式蓋子組件1300/平板裝置1100的 代表性剖面圖。圖20B顯示被覆蓋的形態及圖20C顯示 被向後摺的形態,其將該平板裝置1100的保護層1106完 全露出來。 圖21A顯示該磁性地附著至該具有彎曲形狀的外殼 1 102的該鉸鏈跨距件1 340的剖面側視圖1 500。在此實施 例中,外殻1 1 02可具有一彎曲的形狀且是用非磁性材料 φ (譬如,鋁)來製造。磁性元件15 02可被包含於該平板裝 置1100的裝置附著特徵構造108內。在一些實施例中, 爲了要防止金屬與金屬接觸,在該磁性元件1 502是金屬 的實施例中,一保護膜可被附著至該磁性元件1 5 02的一 嚙合表面,其可防止磁性元件1 502與該外殼1102直接接 觸。當考量對應的磁性元件間的磁性嚙合力時,該保護膜 可薄到足以被忽略。如果該磁性元件1 502不是金屬製成 的或如果該外殼1102與該磁性元件1 502接觸的部分不是 金屬話,則該保護膜可以是非必要的。 -61 - M430792 磁性元件1 502可與該鉸鏈跨距件1 340內的對應磁性 元件1504磁性地相互作用。磁性元件 1 504可具有約 2 mm的厚度。該磁性相互作用可產生滿足式(3 a)的淨磁吸 力FNET,其中該分開距離xsep約等於該外殼1102的厚度 t與該標籤1344的厚度“丨”的總和。該厚度“Γ可以是 約0.2mm。因此,爲了要將該分開距離Xsep最小化(及藉 以提高該Fnet),磁性元件1502可被作成符合該外殼 1102的內表面1 506的形狀。又,該標籤1 344及該磁性 元件1 504每一者都可被作成符合該外殼1102的外表面 1 5 08的形狀。以此方式,介於該磁性元件1 502與該磁性 元件1 504之間的距離可被減小至約該外殼1102的厚度t 及該標籤1344的厚度1。 # 爲了要進一步改良介於磁性元件1 502及1 504間的淨 磁吸力Fnet,分磁器(magnetic shunt)1510可被膠黏至該 磁性元件15 04之遠離該外殻1102的部分並包圍該部分。 分磁器1510可用磁活性材料(譬如,鋼或鐵)來製造。該 磁活性材料可將原本被導向遠離磁性元件1 502的磁通量 線重新導向該外殼1102,藉以提高介於該磁性元件1502 與磁性元件1 504間的總磁通量密度 B TOTA L * 造成淨磁吸 力FNET有相對應的增加。該分磁器1510接著被膠黏至該 鉸鏈跨距件1 340的外殼1512。應指出的是,爲了要確保 只有標籤1 344接觸外殼1102的外表面1 5 08 (以避免金屬 與金屬的接觸),該標籤13 44突出(即,突伸出)該鉸鏈跨 距件1 340的外殻1512約“ d”的距離。名義上地,距離 M430792 d可以是約〇. 1 mm。 因爲該淨磁吸力FNET與合作的磁性元件間的分開距 離部分地相關,所以在該平板裝置11〇〇的磁性附著系統 與該鉸鏈跨距件1 340內的磁性元件間的整體完整性會受 到合作的磁性元件間的實際分開距離以及沿著該鉸鏈跨距 件1340的長度L的分開距離的一致性的影響。爲了要沿 著該鉸鏈跨距件1 340提供高度相關聯的磁吸力,該鉸鏈 跨距件1 340內的磁性元件與在該平板裝置1100內的磁性 附著系統的磁性元件間的分開距離被良好的控制。 圖21B顯示磁性地附著至具有平的表面的外殼1102 的該鉸鏈跨距件1 3 40的剖面圖1 550。在此配置中,該標 籤1 344及磁鐵1 5 54每一者都符合該外殼1102的平的形 狀。 爲了要確保該淨磁吸力沿著該鉸鏈跨距件1 340的長 度的一致性,該鉸鏈跨距件1 340的構件可使用固定件 (fixture) 1600來組裝,如圖22A的剖面圖及圖22B的立 體圖所示。固定件16 00可具有符合該外殼1102的外表面 的形狀的表面1 602。爲了要將該鉸鏈跨距件1 340以一種 可確保沿著該鉸鏈跨距件1 340的長度L有一致的磁吸力 的方式組裝(以及爲了要提供美學上令人愉悅的外觀),該 標籤1344被暫時地附著至該固定件1 600的表面1602 上。因爲該表面16〇2實質地伏合該外表面1508的行狀, 所以標籤1 344將具有一同樣符合該外表面1 5 08的形狀的 形狀。在一實施例中,該固定件1600內可被產生部分真 -63- M430792 空,這可讓該標籤13 44在抽吸力下附著至表面1602。以 此方式,該被組裝的鉸鏈跨距件可藉由去除該部分真空而 從該表面1 602被取下。 —但該標籤1 344被固定至該固定件1 600的表面 1 6 02,磁性元件1 504可藉由使用任何適當的黏劑而被設 置成與該標籤1 344直接接觸並附著至該標籤1 344。爲了 要儘可能地減小該分開距離,磁性元件1 504可具有一符 合該標籤1 344與該表面1 602兩者的形狀》以此方式,符 合該標籤13 44與磁性元件1504兩者的形狀可確保磁性元 件1 506與1 5 02之間的分開距離是最小的。磁性元件 1 504然後可被膠黏至該由磁活性材料(譬如,鋼)製成的分 磁器1510,用以將磁通量朝向磁性元件1502聚集。分磁 器1510然後可被該鉸鏈跨距件的外殼1512封包並膠黏至 該外殼1512,留下約d = 0.1mm的標籤 1 344從該外殼 1 5 1 2突伸出。 除了提供該平板裝置1100保護之外,該片段式蓋子 組件1 300可被操作以形成有用的支撐結構。因此,圖23 至26顯示該蓋子組件1 300依據被描述的實施例之有用的 配置。. 例如,如圖23所示,該片段式蓋子組件1 300可被摺 疊使得該插入件1 324的磁性作用部分與磁性元件1 322磁 性地相互作用。應指出的是,用來保持三角支撐結構 1700的磁力約在5至10牛頓(NT)的範圍之間。以此方 式,該三角支撐結構1 700可被防止意外地展開。該三角 M430792 支撐結構1700可被形成爲能夠以許多方式被用來撐高該 平板裝置1 100。例如,該三角支撐結構1700可被用來以 —種符合人體工學的角度相對於一支撐表面放置觸控表面 17 02的方式支撐該平板裝置11〇〇。以此方式,使用者使 用該觸控表面17 02將會是一友善的經驗。這在長期使用 該觸控表面的情況中特別顯著。例如,一虛擬鍵盤可可被 呈現在該觸控表面1702上。該虛擬鍵盤可被用來輸入資 料至該平板裝置1100。藉由使用該三角支撐結構1 700來 將該平板裝置1100支撐在一符合人體工學的角度,重複 運動的有害影響可被降低或甚至是被消除。 圖24A及24B顯示該片段式蓋子組件1300的另一摺 疊操作,其中該三角支撐結構1700可被用來將該平板裝 置1 1 〇〇支撐在一觀看狀態。觀看狀態係指視覺內容(視 覺、靜態照片、卡通片等等)可以與水平成75°角之適合觀 看者的角度來呈現。在此“支架(kickstand)”狀態中,視 覺內容可用易於觀看的角度來呈現。該平板裝置11〇〇的 可觀看區域可用約75°的角度來呈現,該角度是在能夠產 生良好觀看經驗的最佳觀看角度範圍內。 圖25A及25B顯示該片段式蓋子組件1 300被摺疊成 不同的懸掛實施例。懸掛實施例指的是,藉由將該片段式 蓋子組件13 00摺疊成適當的三角形,該平板裝置1100可 如圖26A所示地從上方予以懸掛成一吊具1 900的形式。 該吊具1 900可被用來從上方懸掛該平板裝置1100。例 如,該吊具19 00可藉由使用一支撐物(譬如,一桿)而被 -65- M430792 直接懸掛在天花板上。該吊具1 900可藉由單純地將該片 段式蓋子組件1300摺曼於第一方向上直到該等埋設的磁 鐵1 322磁性地嚙合該用鋼或鐵製成的磁性作用的插入件 1 324爲止來產生。該等埋設的磁鐵1 3 22與該磁性作用的 插入件1 324嚙合所產生的磁性電路可提供將該平板裝置 1100安全地懸掛於任何水平地對準的支撐結構所需之足 夠的支撐》 圖25B顯示適合將該平板裝置1100懸掛於垂直對準 的支撐結構(譬如,牆壁)上的吊具實施。詳言之,吊具 1910可被機械地附著至一牆壁或其它垂直的支撐結構。 吊具1910然後可如牆壁安裝座之類者被用來將懸掛該平 板裝置1100。以此方式,該平板裝置1100可如一用於視 覺內容的視覺顯示器,或用於靜態影像(譬如照片、藝術 品、及類此者)的壁掛件之類者被用來呈現視覺內容物。 圖26A-26B顯示該三角支撐結構1 700可被用作爲一 把手的配置2000。藉由摺疊該片段式蓋子組件1 300使得 該等片段部分彼此相互作用以形成可被用作爲把手的三角 形支撐結構。因此,該平板裝置1100可以像一個人拿起 一本書來看一般地被拿起來。該片段式蓋子組件1300的 本體可提供方便的抓握構造,其可在該三角支撐結構被用 來如一本書般地拿著該平板裝置1100時更牢靠地握住該 三角支撐結構1700。 在該平板裝置1100包括影像拍攝裝置(譬如,面向前 方的照相機2002及面向後方的照相機2004)的例子中, M430792 視覺內容可被該平板裝置1100呈現。以此方式,該三角 支撐結構1 70 0可如一相機握把般地被用作爲一握持件。 因此,該三角支撐結構1700可提供方便且有效的機構, 其在影像拍攝過程中提供幫助。例如,當該平板裝置 1100被用來拍攝影像時,該平板裝置1100可藉由該三角 支撐結構17 00而被穩穩地握持且該面向後的照相機2004 可被指向一物件。該物件的影像然後可被如圖25 B所示地 被呈現在該平板裝置11〇〇的顯示器上。以此方式,該面 向前方的照相機2002及/或該面向後方的照相機2004可 被用來拍攝靜態影像或視訊,譬如視訊聊天中,或單純地 觀看視訊演出。作爲視訊聊天的一部分,一虛擬聊天的參 與者可在使用該三角支撐結構1700來握持該平板裝置 1 1 00的同時輕易地進行一視訊交談。 圖27A-27C顯示該蓋子組件1 300及該平板裝置1100 的形態2100,其顯示出被稱爲該平板裝置11〇〇的偷窺模 式操作的情況。詳言之,當片段13 〇4從該玻璃蓋11 06上 被掀起來時,在該平板裝置11〇〇內的感測器可偵測到該 片段1304且只有該片段1304從該玻璃層1106被掀起 來。一但偵測到時,該平板裝置1 1 00可以只激活該顯示 器之被外露的部分2102。例如,該平板裝置11〇〇可運用 霍耳效應感測器來偵測該片段1034已從該玻璃蓋1106上 被掀起來。額外的感測器(譬如,光學感測器)可偵測是否 只有片段13 04被掀起或是否有額外的片段被掀起來。 如圖27B所示,當該平板裝置1100決定只有片段 -67- M430792 1 304被掀起來時,該平板裝置1100可將操作狀態改變爲 “偷窺”狀態,在偷窺狀態中該顯示器外露的部分2 1 02 呈現圖像(icon)2 104形式的視覺內容。因此,視覺內容形 式的資訊(譬如,時間、日期、筆記等等)可被提供,用以 只在該顯示器之可觀看的部分觀看。一但感測器偵測到該 片段13 04被放回到該玻璃層1106上時,該平板裝置 1 1 00可回復到之前的操作狀態,譬如休眠狀態。再者, 在另一實施例中,當一被設置來回應觸碰的圖像被顯示 時,則觸碰敏感層之對應於該顯示器之可看到的部分的部 分亦可被激活。 再者,如圖27C所示,當額外的片段從該覆蓋玻璃 1106被掀起來以進一步露出複蓋玻璃1106的第二部分 2106時,該顯示器的第二部分2106可被激活》以此方 式,在該“擴大的”偷窺模式中,額外的視覺資訊(譬 如,圖像2108)可被呈現在該顯示器之被激活的部分上。 應指出的是,當片段從覆蓋玻璃1106被掀起時,該顯示 器之額外的片段可被激活。以此方式,可提供擴大的偷窺 模式。 或者,該平板裝置1100可在該摺片從該顯示器被移 走時藉由單純的激活該顯示器及在該顯示器被該摺片覆蓋 時關閉(休眠)該顯示器以回應來自該等霍耳效應感測器的 訊號。在一實施例中,該等磁性元件 1 322的子集合 (subset)可配合在附著特徵構造110內的對應磁性元件 402被用來將該覆蓋組件1 300固定至該平板裝置1100的 M430792 覆蓋玻璃11 06上。又,至少磁鐵1326可被用來激活該磁 性敏感電路4 04。例如,當該片段式蓋子1300被放置在 該平板裝置1100的覆蓋玻璃1106上時,來自磁鐵1326 的磁場可被磁性敏感電路404(其可以是霍耳效應感測器 的形式)偵測到》該磁場的偵測可造成該霍耳效應感測器 118產生一訊號,它可造成該平板裝置11〇〇操作狀態的 改變。 例如,當霍耳效應感測器1 1 8偵測到該片段式蓋子 1 3 00與該覆蓋玻璃1106接觸時(這代表該顯示是不可觀 看),由該霍耳感器118送出的該訊號可被該平板裝置_ 1100內的處理器解譯,用以將目前的操作狀態改變成休 眠狀態。在另一方面,當該片段1 3 04從該覆蓋玻璃1106 •被掀起來時,該霍耳效應感測器118可藉由送出另一訊號 至該處理器以回應該磁鐵1326的磁場的移除。該處理器 可藉由再次改變目前的操作狀態來解譯此訊號。此改變可 包括將操作狀態從休眠狀態改變至作用狀態。在另一實施 例中,該處理器可藉由將該平板裝置1100的操作狀態改 變至偷窺狀態來解譯由該霍耳效應感測器118以及其它感 測器送出的訊號,在偷窺模式中只有該顯示器因該片段 1304掀起來而被外露的部分被激活且能夠顯示視覺內容 及/或接收(或送出)視覺輸入。 在一些例子中,當片段1 306在同一時間從該覆蓋玻 璃1106被掀起時,該霍耳效應感測器118會指出該片段 1304亦被掀起,霍耳效應感測器118之外的其它感測器 -69- M430792 的存在可.造成該處理器進入一擴大的偷窺模式,在該模式 中對應於該顯示器被額外地露出來部分的額外顯示資源亦 被激活。例如,如果該平板裝置Π00包括可偵測一特定 片段的存在的其它感測器(譬如,光學感測器)的話,則來 自霍耳效應感測器118的訊號結合其它感測器訊號可提供 該處理器一指示,即該顯示器組件的一特定的部分或一些 部分目前是可觀看的且可呈現視覺內容。 圖28A顯示依據一特定實施例的蓋子組件2200。該 蓋子組件2200可包括一附著至樞轉組件2204的片段式蓋 子22 02,其以分解圖來顯示。該樞轉組件22 04可包括端 凸部 2206及2208,其藉由鉸鏈跨距件2210及連接桿 22 12(其可被包封於套管2214內,該套管被連接至或包封 於該片段式蓋子2202內且看不到)而彼此樞軸地連接。以 此方式,至少兩個樞轉軸線2216及2218可被提供用來樞 轉地移動端凸部2206及2208、鉸鏈跨距件2210及連接 桿2212。例如,鉸鏈跨距件2210 (及端凸部2206與2208) 可繞著樞轉軸線2216轉動而連接桿2212(及端凸部2206 與2208)可繞著樞轉軸線2218轉動。應指出的是,連接 桿2212及鉸鏈跨距件2210可彼此獨立地樞轉。該樞轉可 同時發生或在不同時間發生,這讓該樞轉組件2204有至 少四種獨立的軸轉動方向。 爲了要防止在該鉸鏈跨距件2210磁性地耦接至該平 板裝置1100時金屬對金屬的接觸,標籤丨220可被貼附照 該鉸鏈跨距件2210的外表面上且緩衝件2222可被貼附至 M430792 端凸部2206及2208的外表面上。標籤2220及緩衝件 2222可用能夠承受重複與外殼102接觸而不會損傷或以 其它方式傷害該外殼102的外觀的材料來製造。因此,標 籤2 22〇及緩衝件2222可用紙、布料、塑膠來製造且藉由 使用黏劑(如,膠水)而被黏接至鉸鏈跨距件2210與端凸 部2206及22 08。在一些例子中,該黏劑可具有能夠在有 需要時輕易地更換標籤2220及/或緩衝件2222的特性。W Figures 19A and 19B show details of two embodiments of the hinge span 1340. In particular, Figure 19A shows an embodiment 14 00 of a hinge span wherein a magnetically passive spacer is used to separate and secure the magnetic components. In particular, the hinge span 1400 can enclose and support a magnetic element 1402 that is used by the magnetic attachment feature 202 to magnetically attach the segmented lid assembly 1 300 to the tablet device 1 1〇〇 . The magnetic elements 1402 can be configured in a particular configuration, with Φ matching the corresponding magnetic elements within the device attachment feature 108 of the tablet device 110. In this manner, the segmented lid assembly 1 300 and the tablet device 1100 can be attached to each other accurately and reproducibly. In order to maintain a repeatable and stable magnetic engagement for a long period of time, the magnetic elements 1 402 can be maintained in a stable configuration. In other words, the magnetic elements 1402 within the hinge span 1400 should remain in their relative positions and poles for a prolonged period of time relative to corresponding magnetic elements in the magnetic attachment system of the tablet device 1100. This is particularly important when the cover subassembly 1 300 and/or the expected lifetime of the tablet unit 1100 -59-M430792 is expected to have repeated attachment cycles. Here, to ensure the integrity of the magnetic engagement throughout the many attachment cycles, the configuration of the magnetic elements 1402 can remain substantially relative to each other and to the corresponding magnetic elements within the device attachment feature configuration 108. fixed. Thus, in order to ensure that the physical layout of the magnetic elements 1 402 remains substantially stationary, the entanglement material 1404 can be inserted between the different magnetic elements 1402 within the hinge span 1400. The filling material 1404 can be a non-magnetic material such as plastic. The squeezing material 1404 can be formed into a shape that can be embedded in a gap space between magnetic elements. In this manner, the magnetic element 1402 can be maintained in a fixed and stable configuration for a long period of time. In another aspect, Figure 19B shows another embodiment in which the hinge span 1340 is presented in the form of a hinge span 1410 that utilizes mutual magnetic attraction between physically adjacent magnetic elements to secure the magnetic components to Positioning. In this way, the number of constituent parts can be reduced. Furthermore, since the area occupied by the magnetic elements 1 402 is reduced, the corresponding magnetic flux density can be improved. However, the end plug 1412 can be used to secure the magnetic elements positioned at the ends of the hinge span 1410. When the magnetic elements positioned at the ends of the hinge span 1410 have aligned poles, the end plugs 1412 must be used to overcome the net magnetic mutual repulsion. In addition to the end plug 1412, another embodiment can provide a centrally disposed spacer 1 14 14 . The centrally disposed spacers 1 4 1 4 can be made of a magnetically passive material and can be used to secure the magnetic elements 1402 in position. Figure 19C shows that when the segmented lid assembly 1 300 is magnetically attached to the tablet device 1100, the hinge span member 1340 forms a portion of the mating surface. In particular, the label 1 344 is shown attached to the hinge span 1 340 by using an adhesive (e.g., glue). It should be noted that the label 134 is configured to conform to the shape of the portion of the outer casing 1 102 that forms part of the engagement surface. In this way, the separation distance between the corresponding magnetic elements can be minimized. Figure 20A shows a representative side view of a segmented φ lid assembly 1 300 that is magnetically attached to the tablet device 1100. Figure 20B shows a representative cross-sectional view of the segmented lid assembly 1300/plate apparatus 1100 taken along line A-A of Figure 18. Fig. 20B shows a covered form and Fig. 20C shows a form folded back, which completely exposes the protective layer 1106 of the tablet device 1100. Figure 21A shows a cross-sectional side view 1500 of the hinge span 1 340 magnetically attached to the outer casing 1 102 having a curved shape. In this embodiment, the outer casing 1 102 may have a curved shape and be made of a non-magnetic material φ (e.g., aluminum). Magnetic element 152 can be included within device attachment feature 108 of tablet device 1100. In some embodiments, in order to prevent metal from metal contact, in embodiments where the magnetic element 1 502 is metal, a protective film can be attached to an engagement surface of the magnetic element 105, which prevents the magnetic element. The 1 502 is in direct contact with the housing 1102. When considering the magnetic meshing force between the corresponding magnetic members, the protective film can be thin enough to be ignored. If the magnetic element 1 502 is not made of metal or if the portion of the outer casing 1102 that is in contact with the magnetic element 1 502 is not metal, the protective film may not be necessary. - 61 - M430792 Magnetic element 1 502 can magnetically interact with a corresponding magnetic element 1504 within the hinge span 1 340. Magnetic element 1 504 can have a thickness of about 2 mm. The magnetic interaction produces a net magnetic attraction FNET that satisfies equation (3a), wherein the separation distance xsep is approximately equal to the sum of the thickness t of the outer casing 1102 and the thickness "丨" of the label 1344. The thickness "Γ" may be about 0.2 mm. Therefore, in order to minimize the separation distance Xsep (and thereby increase the Fnet), the magnetic member 1502 may be formed to conform to the shape of the inner surface 1 506 of the outer casing 1102. The label 1 344 and the magnetic element 1 504 can each be shaped to conform to the outer surface 158 of the outer casing 1102. In this manner, the distance between the magnetic element 1 502 and the magnetic element 1 504 It can be reduced to about the thickness t of the outer casing 1102 and the thickness 1 of the label 1344. # In order to further improve the net magnetic attraction Fnet between the magnetic elements 1 502 and 1 504, the magnetic shunt 1510 can be Adhesive to the portion of the magnetic element 154 away from the outer casing 1102 and surrounding the portion. The magnetic separator 1510 can be fabricated from a magnetically active material such as steel or iron. The magnetically active material can be directed away from the magnetic element. The magnetic flux line of 1 502 is redirected to the outer casing 1102, thereby increasing the total magnetic flux density B TOTA L * between the magnetic element 1502 and the magnetic element 1 504 resulting in a corresponding increase in the net magnetic attraction force FNET. The splitter 1510 The outer casing 1512 is glued to the hinge span 1 340. It should be noted that in order to ensure that only the label 1 344 contacts the outer surface 1 5 08 of the outer casing 1102 (to avoid metal-to-metal contact), the label 13 44 protrudes (i.e., protrudes) from the outer casing 1512 of the hinge span member 1340 by a distance of about "d". Nominally, the distance M430792d may be about 〇1 mm. Because of the net magnetic attraction FNET and cooperation The separation distance between the magnetic elements is partially related, so the overall integrity between the magnetic attachment system of the tablet device 11 and the magnetic components within the hinge span 1 340 is subject to actual separation between the cooperating magnetic components. The effect of the distance and the uniformity of the separation distance along the length L of the hinge span 1340. In order to provide a highly correlated magnetic attraction along the hinge span 1 340, the hinge span 1 340 The separation distance between the magnetic element and the magnetic element of the magnetic attachment system within the tablet device 1100 is well controlled. Figure 21B shows the hinge span 1 1 40 magnetically attached to the housing 1102 having a flat surface. Figure 1 550. In this configuration, the label 1 344 and the magnet 1 5 54 each conform to the flat shape of the outer casing 1102. To ensure that the net magnetic attraction is along the length of the hinge span 1 340 Consistency, the components of the hinge span 1 340 can be assembled using a fixture 1600, as shown in the cross-sectional view of Figure 22A and the perspective view of Figure 22B. The fixture 16 00 can have a surface 1 602 that conforms to the shape of the outer surface of the outer casing 1102. In order to assemble the hinge span 1 340 in a manner that ensures a consistent magnetic attraction along the length L of the hinge span 1 340 (and to provide an aesthetically pleasing appearance), the label 1344 is temporarily attached to the surface 1602 of the fixture 1 600. Since the surface 16〇2 substantially volatizes the row of the outer surface 1508, the label 1 344 will have a shape that also conforms to the shape of the outer surface 15008. In an embodiment, a portion of the true -63-M430792 can be created in the fixture 1600, which allows the label 13 44 to adhere to the surface 1602 under suction. In this manner, the assembled hinge span can be removed from the surface 1 602 by removing the partial vacuum. - but the label 1 344 is fixed to the surface 106 of the fixture 1 600, and the magnetic element 1 504 can be placed in direct contact with the label 1 344 and attached to the label 1 by using any suitable adhesive 344. In order to reduce the separation distance as much as possible, the magnetic element 1 504 may have a shape conforming to both the label 1 344 and the surface 1 602 in such a manner as to conform to the shape of both the label 13 44 and the magnetic element 1504. It can be ensured that the separation distance between the magnetic elements 1 506 and 1 52 is minimal. The magnetic element 1 504 can then be glued to the magnetizer 1510 made of a magnetically active material (e.g., steel) for focusing the magnetic flux toward the magnetic element 1502. The splitter 1510 can then be encapsulated and glued to the outer casing 1512 of the hinge span member, leaving the label 1 344 about d = 0.1 mm projecting from the outer casing 1521. In addition to providing protection for the tablet device 1100, the segmented lid assembly 1 300 can be operated to form a useful support structure. Thus, Figures 23 through 26 show a useful configuration of the lid assembly 1 300 in accordance with the described embodiment. For example, as shown in Figure 23, the segmented lid assembly 1 300 can be folded such that the magnetically active portion of the insert 1 324 magnetically interacts with the magnetic element 1 322. It should be noted that the magnetic force used to maintain the triangular support structure 1700 is between about 5 and 10 Newtons (NT). In this manner, the triangular support structure 1 700 can be prevented from unintentionally unfolding. The triangular M430792 support structure 1700 can be formed to be used to support the tablet device 1 100 in a number of ways. For example, the triangular support structure 1700 can be used to support the tablet device 11 in a manner that places the touch surface 172 relative to a support surface at an ergonomic angle. In this way, the user's use of the touch surface 172 will be a friendly experience. This is particularly remarkable in the case where the touch surface is used for a long time. For example, a virtual keyboard cocoa is presented on the touch surface 1702. The virtual keyboard can be used to input data to the tablet device 1100. By using the triangular support structure 1 700 to support the tablet device 1100 at an ergonomic angle, the detrimental effects of repeated motion can be reduced or even eliminated. 24A and 24B show another folding operation of the segmented lid assembly 1300, wherein the triangular support structure 1700 can be used to support the tablet unit 1 1 〇〇 in a viewing state. Viewing state means that visual content (visual, still photos, cartoons, etc.) can be presented at an angle of 75° to the viewer's perspective. In this "kickstand" state, visual content can be presented in an easy to view angle. The viewable area of the tablet unit 11〇〇 can be presented at an angle of about 75° which is within an optimal viewing angle range that produces good viewing experience. Figures 25A and 25B show the segmented lid assembly 1 300 being folded into different suspension embodiments. The suspension embodiment means that by folding the segmented lid assembly 13 00 into a suitable triangle, the tablet device 1100 can be suspended from above into the form of a spreader 1 900 as shown in Fig. 26A. The spreader 1 900 can be used to suspend the tablet device 1100 from above. For example, the spreader 19 00 can be suspended directly from the ceiling by the -65-M430792 by using a support (e.g., a rod). The spreader 1 900 can be magnetically engaged with the magnetically acting insert 1 324 made of steel or iron by simply folding the segmented lid assembly 1300 in a first direction until the embedded magnets 1 322 magnetically engage the magnets 1 322 Produced so far. The magnetic circuit created by the engagement of the embedded magnets 1 32 with the magnetically acting inserts 1 324 provides sufficient support for the panel device 1100 to be safely suspended from any horizontally aligned support structure. 25B shows a spreader implementation suitable for suspending the tablet device 1100 on a vertically aligned support structure, such as a wall. In particular, the spreader 1910 can be mechanically attached to a wall or other vertical support structure. The spreader 1910 can then be used to suspend the panel device 1100, such as a wall mount. In this manner, the tablet device 1100 can be used to present visual content, such as a visual display for visual content, or a wall mount for still images such as photographs, artwork, and the like. Figures 26A-26B show that the triangular support structure 1 700 can be used as a handle configuration 2000. By folding the segmented lid assembly 1 300, the segments interact with each other to form a triangular support structure that can be used as a handle. Therefore, the tablet device 1100 can be picked up as if a person picked up a book. The body of the segmented lid assembly 1300 provides a convenient gripping configuration that can more securely hold the triangular support structure 1700 when the triangular support structure is used to hold the tablet device 1100 as a book. In the example where the tablet device 1100 includes image capturing devices (e.g., front facing camera 2002 and rear facing camera 2004), M430792 visual content can be presented by the tablet device 1100. In this manner, the triangular support structure 1 70 0 can be used as a grip as a camera grip. Thus, the triangular support structure 1700 can provide a convenient and efficient mechanism that assists during image capture. For example, when the tablet device 1100 is used to capture an image, the tablet device 1100 can be stably held by the triangular support structure 17 00 and the rearward facing camera 2004 can be pointed at an object. An image of the object can then be presented on the display of the tablet device 11A as shown in Figure 25B. In this manner, the forward facing camera 2002 and/or the rear facing camera 2004 can be used to capture still images or video, such as in a video chat, or simply to view a video presentation. As part of the video chat, a virtual chat participant can easily perform a video conversation while using the triangular support structure 1700 to hold the tablet device 1 00. Figures 27A-27C show the lid assembly 1 300 and the form 2100 of the tablet unit 1100 showing the voyeur mode operation referred to as the tablet unit 11〇〇. In particular, when the segment 13 〇 4 is picked up from the cover glass 106, the sensor in the tablet device 11 detects the segment 1304 and only the segment 1304 is from the glass layer 1106. Was picked up. Upon detection, the tablet device 1 100 can activate only the exposed portion 2102 of the display. For example, the tablet device 11 can utilize a Hall effect sensor to detect that the segment 1034 has been picked up from the glass cover 1106. Additional sensors (such as optical sensors) can detect if only segment 13 04 is picked up or if additional segments are picked up. As shown in FIG. 27B, when the tablet device 1100 decides that only the segment-67-M430792 1 304 is picked up, the tablet device 1100 can change the operation state to the "peeping" state, and the exposed portion of the display in the voyeur state 2 1 02 Presents the visual content of the image (icon) 2 104. Thus, information in the form of visual content (e.g., time, date, notes, etc.) can be provided for viewing only in the viewable portion of the display. Once the sensor detects that the segment 13 04 is placed back on the glass layer 1106, the tablet device 1 100 can revert to the previous operational state, such as a sleep state. Moreover, in another embodiment, when an image set to respond to the touch is displayed, the portion of the touch sensitive layer corresponding to the visible portion of the display can also be activated. Again, as shown in Figure 27C, when additional segments are picked up from the cover glass 1106 to further expose the second portion 2106 of the cover glass 1106, the second portion 2106 of the display can be activated" in this manner, In this "expanded" voyeur mode, additional visual information (e.g., image 2108) can be presented on the activated portion of the display. It should be noted that when the segment is picked up from the cover glass 1106, additional segments of the display can be activated. In this way, an expanded voyeur mode can be provided. Alternatively, the tablet device 1100 can respond to the sense of Hall effect by simply activating the display when the flap is removed from the display and closing (sleeping) the display when the display is covered by the flap. The signal of the detector. In an embodiment, a subset of the magnetic elements 1 322 can be mated with a corresponding magnetic element 402 within the attachment feature 110 to secure the cover assembly 1 300 to the M430792 cover glass of the tablet device 1100. 11 06 on. Also, at least magnet 1326 can be used to activate the magnetically sensitive circuit 404. For example, when the segmented cover 1300 is placed over the cover glass 1106 of the tablet device 1100, the magnetic field from the magnet 1326 can be detected by the magnetic sensitive circuit 404 (which can be in the form of a Hall effect sensor). The detection of the magnetic field can cause the Hall effect sensor 118 to generate a signal that can cause a change in the operational state of the tablet device 11. For example, when the Hall effect sensor 1 1 8 detects that the segment cover 1 300 is in contact with the cover glass 1106 (which means the display is not viewable), the signal sent by the Hall sensor 118 It can be interpreted by the processor within the tablet device _ 1100 to change the current operational state to a sleep state. On the other hand, when the segment 1 3 04 is picked up from the cover glass 1106, the Hall effect sensor 118 can return the magnetic field of the magnet 1326 by sending another signal to the processor. except. The processor can interpret the signal by changing the current operational state again. This change can include changing the operational state from a sleep state to an active state. In another embodiment, the processor can interpret the signals sent by the Hall effect sensor 118 and other sensors by changing the operating state of the tablet device 1100 to the voyeur state, in the voyeur mode. Only the display is activated by the exposed portion of the segment 1304 and can display visual content and/or receive (or send) visual input. In some examples, when segment 1 306 is picked up from the cover glass 1106 at the same time, the Hall effect sensor 118 will indicate that the segment 1304 is also picked up, other than the Hall effect sensor 118. The presence of the detector -69-M430792 can cause the processor to enter an expanded voyeur mode in which additional display resources corresponding to the portion of the display that is additionally exposed are also activated. For example, if the tablet device 00 includes other sensors (eg, optical sensors) that can detect the presence of a particular segment, the signals from the Hall effect sensor 118 can be provided in conjunction with other sensor signals. The processor indicates that a particular portion or portions of the display component are currently viewable and can present visual content. FIG. 28A shows a lid assembly 2200 in accordance with a particular embodiment. The lid assembly 2200 can include a segmented cover 22 02 attached to the pivot assembly 2204, which is shown in an exploded view. The pivoting assembly 22 04 can include end projections 2206 and 2208 that are enclosed by a hinge span 2210 and a connecting rod 22 12 (which can be enclosed within a sleeve 2214 that is attached or enclosed The segmented cover 2202 is not visible in the interior and is pivotally connected to each other. In this manner, at least two pivot axes 2216 and 2218 can be provided to pivotally move the end projections 2206 and 2208, the hinge span 2210, and the connecting rod 2212. For example, the hinge span 2210 (and the end projections 2206 and 2208) can be rotated about the pivot axis 2216 and the connecting rod 2212 (and the end projections 2206 and 2208) can be rotated about the pivot axis 2218. It should be noted that the connecting rod 2212 and the hinge span member 2210 can pivot independently of each other. This pivoting can occur simultaneously or at different times, which allows the pivot assembly 2204 to have at least four independent axes of rotation. In order to prevent metal-to-metal contact when the hinge span 2210 is magnetically coupled to the tablet device 1100, the label cassette 220 can be attached to the outer surface of the hinge span 2210 and the cushion member 2222 can be Attached to the outer surface of the M430792 end projections 2206 and 2208. The label 2220 and the cushioning member 2222 can be fabricated from a material that can withstand repeated contact with the outer casing 102 without damaging or otherwise damaging the appearance of the outer casing 102. Thus, the label 2 22〇 and the cushioning member 2222 can be made of paper, cloth, plastic and bonded to the hinge span 2210 and the end projections 2206 and 22 08 by the use of an adhesive (e.g., glue). In some examples, the adhesive can have the property of being able to easily replace the label 2220 and/or the cushioning member 2222 when needed.

圖28B顯示該樞轉組件2204的一組裝好的實施例其 顯示該端凸部2206及2208及該連接桿2212(位在該套管 2214內)繞著樞轉的樞轉軸線2216可轉動於兩個軸方向 上(即,順時鐘及逆時鐘方向)。應指出的是,端凸部22 06 及2208與鉸鏈跨距件2210可相對於該輸轉軸線2218轉 動於兩個軸方向上(即,順時鐘與逆時鐘方向)。以此方 式’端凸部22 06及2208可繞著樞轉軸線2216及樞轉軸 線2218轉動於4個軸方向上。 圖28C顯示鉸鏈跨距件2210,其詳細地顯示可分別 被用來將該鉸鏈跨距件2210安裝在端凸部2206及2208 內的端銷2224及2226。雖然在此圖中看不到,但端銷 2224及2226可進一步被用來與內部插塞配合用來將包含 在該鉸鏈跨距件2210內端部單元磁性元件固定。這在該 等包含在該鉸鏈跨距件2210內的該等磁性元件的經過編 碼的順序會造成該等端部單元磁性元件磁性地排斥相鄰的 磁性元件的例子中特別有用。 圖28D顯示依據被描述的實施例的鉸鏈跨距件2210 -71 - M430792 的分解圖。該等磁性元件2228可被建構成一經過編碼的 磁性結構,在該磁性結構中個別的磁性元件可被安排成磁 極、強度、大小等等的一特定的模式。在所示的實施例 中,那些彼此相鄰接具有反向對準的(anti-aligned)磁極的 磁鐵可依賴它們相互的磁吸力來保持它們在該經過編碼的 磁性結構中的位置》然而,該等被設置成彼此相鄰接具有 反向對準的磁極的磁性元件需要外部力量來克服相互的磁 性排斥力,用以保持它們在該經過編碼的磁性結構中的位 置。例如,磁性元件228 1 - 1及228 1 -2每一者可用兩個具 有對準的磁極的磁鐵來形成。在此情況中,形成磁性元件 2281-1(及2281 -2)的兩個磁鐵中的每一者將具有對準的磁 極,因此將產生淨磁斥力於它們之間。因此,一外部施加 的限制可藉由例如分別使用插塞2232-1及2232-2來予以 施加。磁鐵2228-3及2228-4提供的磁吸力(它們分別與 磁鐵2228- 1及2228 -2反向對準)有助於穩定該被包封於 該鉸鏈跨距件22 1 0內經過編碼的磁性結構。用磁性鈍態 材料製成的間隔件2234可被用來提供該由磁性元件2228 形成的經過編碼的磁性結構額外的實體完整性。 爲了要改善整體淨磁吸力,用磁活性材料(譬如,鋼) 製成的分磁器2236可被黏附至該等磁性元件2228的背 端》將該分磁器2236放置於背端有助於將原本傳播遠離 該鉸鏈跨距件22 10與該外殼1102間的嚙合表面的磁場線 重新導向。藉由將該等磁場線偏轉朝向該嚙合表面,該等 磁性元件2228在該嚙合表面提供的磁通量密度可被等量 -72- M430792 地提高,用以在該等磁性元件2228與該外殼1102內的對 應磁性構件間獲得增強的淨磁吸力。 • 如之前討論過的,標籤2220可被黏附至該等磁性元 . 件2228(及間隔件2234,如果有的話),該等磁性元件然 後被黏附至分磁器223 6。分磁器2236可被黏附至該鉸鏈 跨距件2210內的開口 2238,讓該標籤2220突伸出約 “d”的距離,該距離可以是約0.1-0.2 mm,以防止該鉸 A 鏈跨距件2210與該外殼1102之間金屬對金屬的接觸。28B shows an assembled embodiment of the pivot assembly 2204 showing that the end projections 2206 and 2208 and the connecting rod 2212 (located within the sleeve 2214) are rotatable about a pivoting pivot axis 2216. Two axes in the direction (ie, clockwise and counterclockwise). It should be noted that the end projections 2206 and 2208 and the hinge span member 2210 are rotatable relative to the axis of rotation 2218 in two axial directions (i.e., clockwise and counterclockwise). In this manner, the end projections 22 06 and 2208 are rotatable about the pivot axis 2216 and the pivot axis 2218 in four axial directions. Figure 28C shows a hinge span 2210 showing in detail the end pins 2224 and 2226 that can be used to mount the hinge span 2210 in the end projections 2206 and 2208, respectively. Although not visible in this view, the end pins 2224 and 2226 can be further utilized to mate with the inner plug for securing the unit magnetic elements contained within the inner end of the hinge span 2210. This is particularly useful in the example where the encoded sequences of the magnetic elements contained within the hinge span 2210 cause the end unit magnetic elements to magnetically repel adjacent magnetic elements. Figure 28D shows an exploded view of hinge span members 2210-71-M430792 in accordance with the described embodiment. The magnetic elements 2228 can be constructed as an encoded magnetic structure in which individual magnetic elements can be arranged in a particular pattern of magnetic poles, strength, size, and the like. In the illustrated embodiment, those magnets that are adjacent to each other with anti-aligned poles may rely on their mutual magnetic attraction to maintain their position in the encoded magnetic structure. The magnetic elements that are disposed adjacent to each other with magnetic poles that are reversely aligned require external forces to overcome mutual magnetic repulsive forces to maintain their position in the encoded magnetic structure. For example, each of the magnetic elements 228 1 -1 and 228 1 -2 can be formed by two magnets having aligned magnetic poles. In this case, each of the two magnets forming magnetic element 2281-1 (and 2281-2) will have aligned poles, thus creating a net magnetic repulsion between them. Therefore, an externally applied restriction can be applied by, for example, using the plugs 2232-1 and 2232-2, respectively. The magnetic forces provided by magnets 2228-3 and 2228-4, which are inversely aligned with magnets 2228-1 and 2228-2, respectively, help to stabilize the encoded enveloped within the hinge span 22 1 0 Magnetic structure. A spacer 2234 made of a magnetically passive material can be used to provide additional physical integrity of the encoded magnetic structure formed by the magnetic element 2228. In order to improve the overall net magnetic attraction, a magnetizer 2236 made of a magnetically active material (e.g., steel) can be adhered to the back end of the magnetic element 2228. "Place the magnetizer 2236 at the back end to help the original." The magnetic field lines propagating away from the mating surface between the hinge span 22 10 and the outer casing 1102 are redirected. By deflecting the magnetic field lines toward the mating surface, the magnetic flux density provided by the magnetic elements 2228 at the mating surface can be increased by an equal amount - 72 - M430792 for use in the magnetic elements 2228 and the housing 1102 An enhanced net magnetic attraction is obtained between the corresponding magnetic members. • As previously discussed, the label 2220 can be adhered to the magnetic elements 2228 (and the spacers 2234, if any), which are then adhered to the splitter 2236. The splitter 2236 can be adhered to the opening 2238 in the hinge span 2210 such that the label 2220 protrudes a distance of about "d", which can be about 0.1-0.2 mm to prevent the hinge A chain span Metal-to-metal contact between the piece 2210 and the outer casing 1102.

W 應指出的是,在該鍵盤配置及顯示配置,該鉸鏈跨距 件2210會因爲該平板裝置11〇〇以一角度放置在支撐表面 上而受到剪力。該剪力可受到產生在該鉸鏈跨距件2210 與該平板裝置1100的裝置附著特徵構造之間的淨磁吸力 的抵抗。 圖29顯示該片段式蓋子2202的分解圖。底層2250 可與一受保護的表面(譬如,一顯示器的覆蓋玻璃)直接接 φ 觸。底層2250可用能夠被動地清潔該受保護的表面的材 料來製造。該材料以是例如微纖維材料.。底層2250可附 著至由彈性材料(譬如,塑膠)製成的強化層2252。該加強 層2252然後可被黏附至插入件2254以形成一包括黏劑層 2256、層疊材料2258及插入件2254的層疊結構。某些插 入件22 54可容納被埋設的構件。例如,插入件2254- 1可 容納磁鐵22 60,該等磁鐵2260的一部分可與埋設在該平 板裝置1100內相對應的附著特徵構造合作,用以將該片 段式蓋子2202固定至該平板裝置1100。至少一磁鐵 -73- M430792 2260-1可被放置及作成與包含在該平板裝置1100內的磁 性敏感電路(譬如,霍耳效應感測器)相互作用的位置與大 小。應指出的是,雖然某些磁鐵2260被特別地設置用以 只與附著特徵構造相互作用,但實質地所有磁鐵2260都 可與埋設在用來形成不同的二角形支撐結構的片段2254-2內的磁性作用板2262磁性地相互作用。以此方式’可 產生強的磁力來提供用於該三角形支撐結構的穩定基礎。 額外的層疊結構可用黏劑層2256、層疊材料2258及 頂層2264來形成。在一些實施例中,一材料的中介層 (intervening layer)可被提供,其具有一有助於頂層2264 的附著之編織結構。該頂層2264可用許多材料來形成, 譬如像是塑膠、革及類此者,以維持該平板裝置11〇〇的 整體外觀及質感。爲了要提供額外的結構性支撐,頂層 22 64可具有由強化桿2266所強化的邊緣,該強化桿可由 塑膠或其它硬質或半硬質的材料形成。 圖30顯示圖29的該片段式蓋子22 00被放置在該平 板裝置1100的覆蓋層1106上的位置的部分剖面圖。應特 別注意的是磁鐵2260-1與霍耳效應感器118的相對位 置。以此方式,當片段式蓋子2200被放置在該覆蓋層 1 106上時,來自磁鐵2260-1的磁場可與該霍耳效應感測 器118相互作用,該感測器可藉由產生一訊號來回應。該 訊號接著可用一種該平板裝置1100的操作狀態可根據該 蓋子2200的存在而改變的方式來予以處理。在另一方 面,移走該蓋子2200可造成該操作狀態回復至先前的操 M430792 作狀態,或另一操作狀態(譬如,偷窺模式)。應指出的 是,介於該磁鐵2260- 1與霍耳效應感器118之間的磁場 密度可以是約5 00高斯。然而,在該蓋子2200被翻到該 外殻1102的背面的實施例中,在該霍耳效應感測器118 處的磁通量密度可以是約5高斯。 圖31A顯示該鉸鏈跨距件2210在與該平板裝置1100 內的裝置附著特徵構造2300嚙合中的剖面圖。詳言之, 該磁性附著特徵構造2 3 00至少包括磁性元件23 02其與磁 性元件2228形成一磁性電路(該磁性元件2228是包含在 該鉸鏈跨距件22 10內的該經過編碼的磁性結構的一部 分)。分磁器2304可被用來將從該磁性元件2302傳播於 一不同於該磁性元件2228的傳播方向的方向上的磁場線 重新導向。以此方式,在嚙合表面2 3 06的磁通量密度可 被等量地增加,藉以提高該淨磁吸力Fnet。磁性附著特徵 構造2300可被包含在該外殻11〇2內成爲一桶2308其被 作成可容納磁性元件2302及分磁器2304的大小。在所描 述的實施例中,桶23 08可提供該磁性元件23 02及該分磁 器23 04支撐。桶2308亦可在該磁性附著特徵構造2300 轉變於有作用的狀態與不作用的狀態之間時引導該磁性元 件23 02及該分磁器2304的運動* 爲了要確保該淨磁吸力Fnet實質地垂直於該嚙合表面 23 06被施加,該磁性元件2228及磁鐵元件2302的磁化 可被建構成它們各自的磁化向量Μ實質地對準。磁化一 詞係指磁鐵可被製造成具有實質被對準於同一方向上的磁 -75- M430792 領域(magnetic domain)。藉由分別對準磁性元件2302及 磁性元件2228的磁化向量Mi及M2,該淨磁吸力Fnet可 實質垂直於該嚙合表面2306被產生》 圖31B顯示在無作用狀態下的該磁性附著特徵構造 2300。當在此無作用狀態時,該磁性附著特徵構造2300 係位在離該外殼1102的外表面至少xq的距離以滿足式 (1)。因此,桶2308必能夠容納磁性元件2302及分磁器 2304從無作用狀態的χ = 〇至作用狀態的約x = XQ的運動。 圖3 2-3 3顯示狀置附著特徵構造108以附著特徵構造 2400的形式呈現的實施例的代表圖。詳言之,附著特徵 構造2400可包括附著至板片彈簧2406的磁性元件2402/ 分磁器2404。板片彈簧2406可藉由緊固件2408被直接 固定至分磁器2404及藉由緊固件2412被固定端部支撐件 2410。端部支撐件2410可附著至一支撐結構(譬如,外 殻),以提供用於該附著特徵構造24 00的支撐。在一實施 例中,對準柱2414可在組裝時被用來提供端部5撐件 2410及板片彈簧2406兩者的對準。圖33顯示該支撐結 構2410/板片彈簧2406界面的放大視圖。 圖34爲一電子裝置所使用的功能性模組的配置3100 的方塊圖。該電子裝置例如可以是平板裝置1100。該配 置3100包括一電子裝置3102,它能夠爲一可攜式媒體裝 置的使用者輸出媒體,而且可對一資料儲存器3104儲存 及取得資料。該配置3100亦包括一圖形使用者界面(GUI) 管理器3 106。該GUI管理器3 106運作用以控制被提供至 M430792 且被顯示在一顯示裝置的資訊。該配置3100亦包括一通 信模組3108,它可促進該可攜式媒體裝置與一配件裝置 • 間的通信。再者,該配置3100包括一配件管理器3110, 它運作用以鑑定並從一可耦接至該可攜式媒體裝置之配件 裝置獲取資料。 圖35爲一適合與被描述的實施例一起使用之電子裝 置3150的方塊圖。該電子裝置3150例示一代表性運算裝 I 置的電路。該電子裝置3150包括一處理器3152,其與用 來控制該電子裝置3150的整體操作的微處理器或控制器 有關。該電子裝置3150儲存與媒體項目有關的媒體資料 於檔案系統3U4及快取記憶體3156中。該檔案系統 3154典型地是一儲存碟片或多個碟片。該檔案系統3154 典型地提供該電子裝置3150高容量的儲存能力。然而, 因爲對該檔案系統3154的存取時間相對慢,所該電子裝 置3150亦可包括一快取記憶體3156。該快取記憶體3156 φ 例如是半導體記憶體的隨機存取記憶體(RAM)。對該快取 記憶體3156的存取時間比該檔案系統3154實質上短許 多。然而,該快取記憶體3156並不像該檔案系統3154般 具有大的儲存容量。又,該檔案系統3154在作用時消耗 的電力比該快取記憶體3156多》當該電子裝置3150是一 用電池3174來提供電力的可攜式媒體裝置時,電力消耗 通常是一項考量因素。該電子裝置3150亦可包括一 RAM 3 170或一唯讀記憶體(ROM)3 172。該ROM 3172可儲存將 以非揮發方式被執行的程式、供用程式(utility)、或處 -77- M430792 理。該RAM 3170提供揮發性資料儲存,譬如用於快取記 億體3156的揮發性資料儲存。 該電子裝置3150亦包括一使用者輸入裝置3158,它 可讓該電子裝置3150的使用者與該電子裝置3 150互動。 例如’該使用者輸入裝置3158可以是各種形式,譬如像 是一按鈕、鍵盤、撥盤、觸控螢幕、聲音輸入界面、視覺 /影像攝取輸入界面、感測器資料形式的輸入等等β再 者,該電子裝置3150包括一顯示器3160(螢幕顯示器)其 可用該處理器3152來控制以顯示資訊給使用者。一資料 匯流排3166可促進該檔案系統3154、該快取記憶體 3156、該處理器3152、及該CODEC 3163之間的資料傳 輸。 在一實施例中,該電子裝置3150將多個媒體項目 (如’歌曲、播客(podcasts)等)儲存在該檔案系統3154 中。當使用者想要讓該電子裝置播放一特定的媒體項目 時,一個可用媒體項目的表單即被顯示在該顯示器3160 上。然後,使用者可使用該使用者輸入裝置3158從該可 用的媒體項目中選取一項目。該處理器3152在接受到一 特定媒體項目的選擇時,將該特定的媒體項目的媒體資料 (如,聲音檔)提供給一編碼器/解碼器(CODEC)3163。該 CODEC 3163然後產生一用於揚聲器3 1 64的類比輸出訊 號。該揚聲器3164可以是該電子裝置3150內部的揚聲器 或該電子裝置3150外部的揚聲器。例如,連接至該電子 裝置3150的頭戴式耳機或耳機可被視爲外部的揚聲器。 M430792 該電子裝置3150亦包括一耦接至一資料鏈3162的網 路/匯流排界面3161。該資料鏈3162允許該電子裝置 • 3150耦接至一主電腦或配件裝置。該資料鏈3162可在一 . 有線式連線或一無線式連線上被提供。在無線式連線的例 子中,該網路/匯流排界面3161可包括一無線收發器。該 等媒體項目(媒體資產)可以是有關於一或多種不同種類的 媒體內容。在一實施例中,該等媒體項目爲聲軌(如,歌 0 取、有聲書、及播客)。在另一實施例中,該等媒體項目 可以是影像(如,相片)。然而,在其它實施例中,該等媒 體項目可以是音訊、圖片或視覺內容的任何組合。感測器 3 1 76可以是用來偵測任何數量的刺激的電路的形式。例 如,感測器3176可包括對於外部磁場有反應的霍耳效應 感器、聲音感測器、光感測器(譬如,光度計)、等等。 該磁性附著特徵構造可被用來磁性地附照至少兩個物 件。該等物件可以有許多形式且實施許多功能。當比此磁 φ 性地附著時,該等物件彼此通信及互動以形成一合作的系 統。該合作的系統可實施操作並提供該等物件分開時無法 獨立地提供的功能。例如,至少一第一物件及一第二物件 可彼此磁性地附著,使得該第一物件可被建構來提供該第 二物件一支撐機構。該支撐機構本質上可以是機械性的。 例如’該第一物件可以是一台座的形式,其可被用來將該 第二物件支撐在一工作表面上,譬如一桌子上。在另一例 子中,該第一物件可以是一懸掛設備的形式。因此,該第 一物件可被用來懸掛該第二物件,該第二物件然後可被用 -79- M430792 作爲一用來呈現視覺內容,譬如視、靜態影像(譬如,相 片)、藝術作品等等,的顯示器。該支撐機構亦可被用作 爲一用來方便抓握或抓持該第二物件的把手。此配置在該 第二物件可呈現視覺內容,譬如影像(靜態或視覺)、文字 (如在一電子書中),或具有影像拍攝〜能力時特別有用,在 該第二物件具有影像拍攝能力的例子中該第二物件可被用 作爲一影像拍攝裝置,譬如一靜態或視覺攝影機且該第一 物件可被建構來作爲一支撐件,如三角架與把手。 該等被描述的實施例可以有許多形式。例如,該附著 可發生在一第一物件與一第二物件之間,其中該第一物件 與該第二物件可以是電子裝置的形式。該等電子裝置可磁 性地彼此附著以形成一合作的電子系統,該等電子裝置在 該電子系統中可彼此通信。資訊可被傳送於該第一及第二 電子裝置之間以作爲此通信的一部分。該資訊可根據處理 的本質在該第一或第二電子裝置被整體地或部分地處理。 以此方式,該合作的電子系統可善用多個磁性地附著且彼 此通信的電子裝置的協同作用的效果。在一實例中,該通 信可使用任何適合的無線通信協定,譬如藍牙(BT)、 GSM、CDMA、WiFi等等,來實施。 該合作的電子系統可以是一陣列的電子裝置的形式。 在一實施例中,該陣列的電子裝置可如一單一的整合的顯 示器般地作用(馬賽克(mosaic)之類者)。在另一實施例 中,該陣列的電子裝置可提供單一的功能或一組功能(譬 如’虛擬鍵盤)。在又另一實施例中,該等電子裝置的至 -80- M430792 少一者可以是電力提供裝置的形式,其可藉由使用該磁性 附著特徵構造被附著至該電子裝置。該電提供裝置可利用 • 機械式連接,譬如電力接頭,或在一些例子中一磁性的充 . 電機構,來提供電流至該電子裝置。該電流可在提供電力 以操作該合作的電子系統的同時在有必要時被用來對一電 池組充電。該被提供的電力可像是一傳水桶的人龍 (bucket bridge)般地從一裝置被傳遞至另一裝置以平衡該 φ 合作的電子系統中的電力分佈及電池組充電程度。 —配件單元包括一配件本體及一磁性組件,其樞軸地 連接至該配件本體,該磁性組件包括一第一多個磁性元件 其以一第一相對尺寸大小沿著一第一直線被安排成彼此鄰 接且根據交替磁極的一第一極性模式加以安排,及一第二 多個磁性構件其以一第二相對尺寸大小沿著該第一直線被 安排成彼此鄰接且根據交替磁極的一第二極性模式加以安 排,其中該磁性組件被設置來將該配件單元磁性地附著至 | 一主體單元(host unit)的第一部分。該第一及第二尺寸大 小及該第一及第二極性模式係彼此相配互補的。該第一極 性模式是{PI,P2,P1}及其中該第二極性模式是{P2, P1,P2},其中P1是第一極性及P2是相反極性《該第一 相對尺寸大小順序是{2L,1L,1L}及其中該第二相對尺 寸大小順序是{1L,1L,2L},其中1L是一有效的單位磁 鐵長度及其中2L是該有效的單位磁鐵長度的兩倍。一 2L 的磁性元件包含了一由具有第一極性P1的第一個1L的磁 性元件其鄰接一具有該第一極性P1的第二個1L的磁性元 -81 - M430792 件構成的組態,其中該第一個1L的磁鐵及該相鄰的第二 個1L的磁鐵係藉由一外部施加的力量抵抗互斥磁力而被 保持在一起。該磁性組件更包含一外殼其具有一前開口及 一分磁器其包封在該外殼內且附著至該第一及第二多個磁 性元件的背部,該分磁器被設置來將至少一些磁場線重新 引導離開該外殼的背側並朝向該前開口,藉以提高介於該 第一及第二多個磁性元件與該主體單元內一相對應的磁性 元件間的磁通量密度。一第一端插塞被插入到該分磁器的 —第一端內及一第二端插塞被插入到該分磁器的一第二端 內,其中該第一及第二端插塞提供該被用來將該2L磁性 元件組態保持在一起之外部施加的力量,其中具有相反磁 極之相鄰接的磁性元件係被一相互吸引的磁力保持在一 起。 該磁性組件亦包括一第一端凸部其樞軸地連接至該外 殻的一端,一第二端凸部其樞軸地連接至該外殼的一相反 端,其中該第一及第二端凸部與該外殼繞著一第一樞軸線 樞轉,一剛硬的連接桿其連接該第一及第二端凸部,及一 套管其被作成可容納該剛硬的連接桿的大小,該套管與該 剛硬的連接桿插入到該配件本體內的一開口中,該剛硬的 連接桿形成一不同於該第一樞軸線的第二樞軸線,該第一 及第二端凸部與該外殼繞著該第二樞軸線樞轉。該配件本 體包含一片段式摺片部分其具有多個片段,其中一最外面 的片段部分包括一第一磁性元件其與該磁性組件合作,用 以將該片段式摺片部分磁性地附著至該主體單元的一與該 -82- M430792 第一部分分開的第二部分,其中該片段式摺片部分具有與 該主體單元的該第二部分一致的大小及形狀。該第一磁性 元件包含多個磁性構件。該主體單元的該第二部分是一顯 示裝置其具有一最上面的保護層。當該片段式摺片部分是 在該最上面的保護層之上時,沒有被用來將該配件單元磁 性地附著至該主體單元的該等多個磁性構件中的至少一磁 性構件被該主體單元內的一感測器偵測到。該感測器根據 該片段式摺片部分相關於該保護層的位置促成該主體單元 的操作狀態的改變且該片段式摺片部分是用皮革或聚氨基 甲酸酯形成的。 該等被描述的實施例的各式態樣、實施例、實體例或 特徵可被分開地或結合地使用。該等被描述的實施例的各 式態樣可用軟體、硬體或硬體與軟體的結合來體現。該等 被描述的實施例亦可被體現爲一非暫時性的電腦可讀取媒 體上的電腦可讀取的程式碼。該電腦可讀取的媒體被界定 爲任何可儲存資料之資料儲存裝置,該資料然後可被一電 腦系統讀取。該電腦可讀取的媒體的例子包括唯讀記憶 體、隨機存取記憶體、CD-ROM、DVD、磁帶、及光學資 料儲存裝置。該電腦可讀取的媒體亦可被分布在網路耦接 的電腦系統上,使得該電腦可讀取的程式碼以分散的方式 被儲存及執行。 爲了說明的目之上面的描述使用特定的術語來提供該 等被描述的實施例一完整的瞭解。然而,對熟習此技藝者 而頁很明顯的是,實施該等被描述的實施例並不需要特定 -83- M430792 的細節。因此,本文中被描述的特定的實施例的上述說明 是爲了例示與描述的目的而被提供。它們並不是要耗盡或 將該等實施例限制在被揭露的特定形式。對熟習此技藝者 而言很明顯的是,在上述的教導之下有許多可能的修改及 變化。 該等被描述的實施例有許多好處。不同的態樣、實施 例或實體例可獲得一或多項下面的好處。該等實施例的許 多特徵及好處從書寫的描述中是顯而易見的,因此隨附的 申請專利範圍是要涵蓋本創作的所有這些特徵及好處。 又’因爲許多修改及變化對於熟習此技藝者而言將很容易 發生’所以該等實施例不應被侷限於所例示及描述之一模 一樣的構造及操作。因此,所以適當的修改及等效物可被 解釋爲落在本創作的範圍內。 【圖式簡單說明】 本創作藉由下面配合附圖的詳細描述將可很容易被瞭 解’其中相同的標號標示相同的結構元件,及其中: 圖1爲可用一種所想要的且可重複的方式彼此可釋開 地附著的一物件與一電子裝置的簡化方塊圖。 圖2A爲依據一被描述的實施例的一物件的簡化立體 圖’該物件可藉由一側邊磁性附著系統而被可釋開地附著 至一電子裝置。 圖2B顯示圖2A的該物件及該電子裝置依據該側邊 磁性附著系統被附著在一起。 -84 - M430792 圖3A爲一藉由一依據一被描述的實施例之頂部磁性 附著系統而被可釋開地附著至一電子裝置的物件的簡化立 體圖。 圖3B顯示圖3A的該物件及該電子裝置使用該頂部 磁性附著系統而彼此被磁性地附著在一起以形成一對應的 系統。 圖4A爲一藉由該頂部磁性附著系統而被可釋開地附 著至一電子裝置的物件的簡化立體圖。 圖4B顯示在閉合形態之圖4A的該被附著的物件與 該電子裝置的一對應的系統。 圖4C顯示圖4B的該對應的系統在打開的形態。 圖5顯示依據被描述的實施例的一電子裝置的一頂視 立體圖》 圖6顯示一磁性附著特徵構造的另一實施例。 圖7A顯示一電子裝置其鄰近一具有磁性附著特徵構 造之附件形式的另一物件。 圖7B顯示依據被描述的實施例之圖7A的電子裝置 與配件裝置之間的磁性相互作用的圖像表示。 圖7C顯示藉由圖7A及7B中的配件裝置與電子裝置 的磁性附著而形成的一合作系統的圖像表示。 圖8A顯示一電子裝置中之附著特徵構造的一實施 例。 圖8B顯示在一配件裝置中與圖8A的附著特徵構造 相對應的一附著特徵構造的一實施例。 -85- M430792 圖9A顯示一在不作用的(inactive)狀態中之代表面性 裝置附著特徵構造。 圖9B顯示圖9A的該代表性裝置附著特徵構造被另 一磁性附著特徵構造作動的情形。 圖9C顯示在該磁性作用物件在場的情形下該磁性附 著特徵構造在不作用的狀態。 圖10顯示一利用一板片彈簧配置來作爲一固定機構 的裝置附著特徵構造的實施例。 圖11A顯示一在不作用的狀態之鍵式(keyed)磁性附 著系統及一相匹配的磁性附著系統的實施例。 圖11B顯示圖11A的該鍵式磁性附著系統被該相匹 配的磁性附著系統作動的情形。 圖12顯示一用於圖11A的該鍵式磁性附著系統的偏 移位置。 圖13顯示一圖表其顯示出磁性附著力與該鍵式磁性 附著特徵構造的相對位置之間的關係。 圖14與15顯示使用於該鍵式磁性附著特徵構造內的 磁性元件的不同實施例。 圖16A顯示一平板裝置(tablet device)形式的電子裝 置與一保護蓋形式的配件裝置的第一立體圖。 圖16B顯示一平板裝置(tablet device)形式的電子裝 置與一保護蓋形式的配件裝置的第二立體圖。 17A顯示由圖16A及16B所示之平板裝置與配件裝 置所形成的該合作系統(co 0P erate system)在蓋合組態的狀 M430792 態。 圖1 7B顯示圖1 7A所示的該合作系統在打開組態的 狀態。 圖18顯示一區段式外蓋組件的實施例的頂式圖。 圖19A-19C顯示依據所描述的實施例的一鉸鏈跨距 件(hinge span)的細部圖式。W It should be noted that in the keyboard configuration and display configuration, the hinge span 2210 is subject to shear forces due to the tablet device 11 being placed at an angle on the support surface. The shear force can be resisted by the net magnetic attraction generated between the hinge span 2210 and the device attachment feature of the tablet device 1100. FIG. 29 shows an exploded view of the segmented cover 2202. The bottom layer 2250 can be directly connected to a protected surface (for example, a cover glass of a display). The bottom layer 2250 can be fabricated from a material that is capable of passively cleaning the protected surface. The material is, for example, a microfiber material. The bottom layer 2250 can be attached to a reinforcing layer 2252 made of an elastic material such as plastic. The reinforcing layer 2252 can then be adhered to the insert 2254 to form a laminated structure comprising an adhesive layer 2256, a laminate 2258, and an insert 2254. Certain inserts 22 54 can accommodate the embedded components. For example, the insert 2254- 1 can accommodate a magnet 2260, a portion of which can cooperate with an attachment feature embedded in the tablet device 1100 for securing the segment cover 2202 to the tablet device 1100. . At least one magnet - 73 - M430792 2260-1 can be placed and formed in a position and size that interacts with a magnetic sensitive circuit (e.g., a Hall effect sensor) contained within the tablet device 1100. It should be noted that although some of the magnets 2260 are specifically configured to interact only with the attachment feature configuration, substantially all of the magnets 2260 can be embedded within the segment 2254-2 that is used to form a different polygonal support structure. The magnetic plates 2262 magnetically interact. In this way, a strong magnetic force can be generated to provide a stable basis for the triangular support structure. Additional laminate structures may be formed using adhesive layer 2256, laminate 2258, and top layer 2264. In some embodiments, an intervening layer of a material can be provided having a woven structure that facilitates attachment of the top layer 2264. The top layer 2264 can be formed from a variety of materials, such as plastic, leather, and the like, to maintain the overall appearance and texture of the tablet unit 11〇〇. In order to provide additional structural support, the top layer 22 64 can have edges that are reinforced by the reinforcing bars 2266, which can be formed from plastic or other hard or semi-rigid materials. Figure 30 is a partial cross-sectional view showing the position of the segment cover 22 00 of Figure 29 placed on the cover layer 1106 of the plate device 1100. Particular attention should be paid to the relative position of the magnet 2260-1 to the Hall effect sensor 118. In this manner, when the segmented cover 2200 is placed over the cover layer 1 106, a magnetic field from the magnet 2260-1 can interact with the Hall effect sensor 118, which can generate a signal To respond. The signal can then be processed in a manner that the operational state of the tablet device 1100 can be varied depending on the presence of the cover 2200. On the other hand, removal of the cover 2200 can cause the operational state to return to the previous operational state, or another operational state (e.g., voyeur mode). It should be noted that the magnetic field density between the magnet 2260-1 and the Hall effect sensor 118 can be about 500 gauss. However, in embodiments where the cover 2200 is flipped over the back of the housing 1102, the magnetic flux density at the Hall effect sensor 118 can be about 5 Gauss. 31A shows a cross-sectional view of the hinge span 2210 in engagement with the device attachment feature 2300 within the tablet device 1100. In particular, the magnetic attachment feature 2 3 00 includes at least a magnetic element 23 02 that forms a magnetic circuit with the magnetic element 2228 (the magnetic element 2228 is the encoded magnetic structure contained within the hinge span 22 10 ) a part of). The demultiplexer 2304 can be used to redirect the magnetic field lines propagating from the magnetic element 2302 in a direction different from the direction of propagation of the magnetic element 2228. In this way, the magnetic flux density at the meshing surface 2 3 06 can be increased by an equal amount, thereby increasing the net magnetic attraction Fnet. Magnetic Attachment Features The construction 2300 can be included in the housing 11A as a barrel 2308 that is sized to accommodate the magnetic element 2302 and the demultiplexer 2304. In the depicted embodiment, the bucket 23 08 can provide the magnetic element 23 02 and the splitter 23 04 support. The barrel 2308 can also guide the movement of the magnetic element 23 02 and the demultiplexer 2304 when the magnetic attachment feature 2300 transitions between an active state and an inactive state * in order to ensure that the net magnetic attraction Fnet is substantially vertical The engagement surface 236 is applied and the magnetization of the magnetic element 2228 and the magnet element 2302 can be constructed to form their respective magnetization vectors Μ substantially aligned. The term magnetization means that the magnet can be fabricated to have a magnetic -75-M430792 magnetic domain that is substantially aligned in the same direction. By aligning the magnetization vectors Mi and M2 of the magnetic element 2302 and the magnetic element 2228, respectively, the net magnetic attraction force Fnet can be generated substantially perpendicular to the engagement surface 2306. Figure 31B shows the magnetic attachment feature configuration 2300 in an inactive state. . When in this inactive state, the magnetic attachment feature 2300 is tied at a distance of at least xq from the outer surface of the outer casing 1102 to satisfy equation (1). Therefore, the barrel 2308 must be able to accommodate the movement of the magnetic element 2302 and the demultiplexer 2304 from the inactive state χ = 〇 to the active state of approximately x = XQ. 3 - 3 3 show a representative view of an embodiment in which the attachment feature 108 is presented in the form of an attachment feature 2400. In particular, the attachment feature formation 2400 can include a magnetic element 2402/divider 2404 attached to the leaf spring 2406. The leaf spring 2406 can be secured directly to the splitter 2404 by fasteners 2408 and the end support 2410 by fasteners 2412. End support 2410 can be attached to a support structure (e.g., outer casing) to provide support for the attachment feature formation 240. In one embodiment, the alignment posts 2414 can be used to provide alignment of both the end 5 struts 2410 and the leaf springs 2406 when assembled. Figure 33 shows an enlarged view of the interface of the support structure 2410 / leaf spring 2406. Figure 34 is a block diagram of a configuration 3100 of a functional module used in an electronic device. The electronic device can be, for example, a tablet device 1100. The configuration 3100 includes an electronic device 3102 that can output media to a user of a portable media device and can store and retrieve data from a data store 3104. The configuration 3100 also includes a graphical user interface (GUI) manager 3 106. The GUI manager 3 106 operates to control information that is provided to the M430792 and displayed on a display device. The configuration 3100 also includes a communication module 3108 that facilitates communication between the portable media device and an accessory device. Moreover, the configuration 3100 includes an accessory manager 3110 that operates to authenticate and retrieve data from an accessory device that is coupled to the portable media device. Figure 35 is a block diagram of an electronic device 3150 suitable for use with the described embodiments. The electronic device 3150 illustrates a circuit of a representative computing device. The electronic device 3150 includes a processor 3152 associated with a microprocessor or controller for controlling the overall operation of the electronic device 3150. The electronic device 3150 stores media data related to the media item in the file system 3U4 and the cache memory 3156. The file system 3154 is typically a storage disc or a plurality of discs. The file system 3154 typically provides a high capacity storage capability of the electronic device 3150. However, because the access time to the file system 3154 is relatively slow, the electronic device 3150 can also include a cache memory 3156. The cache memory 3156 φ is, for example, a random access memory (RAM) of a semiconductor memory. The access time to the cache memory 3156 is substantially shorter than the file system 3154. However, the cache memory 3156 does not have a large storage capacity like the file system 3154. Moreover, the file system 3154 consumes more power than the cache memory 3156 when it is active. When the electronic device 3150 is a portable media device that uses the battery 3174 to provide power, power consumption is usually a consideration. . The electronic device 3150 can also include a RAM 3 170 or a read only memory (ROM) 3 172. The ROM 3172 can store programs, utilities, or -77-M430792 that will be executed in a non-volatile manner. The RAM 3170 provides volatile data storage, such as volatile data storage for the cache. The electronic device 3150 also includes a user input device 3158 that allows a user of the electronic device 3150 to interact with the electronic device 3150. For example, the user input device 3158 can be in various forms, such as a button, a keyboard, a dial, a touch screen, a sound input interface, a visual/image capture input interface, an input of a sensor data format, etc. The electronic device 3150 includes a display 3160 (screen display) that can be controlled by the processor 3152 to display information to the user. A data bus 3166 facilitates data transfer between the file system 3154, the cache memory 3156, the processor 3152, and the CODEC 3163. In one embodiment, the electronic device 3150 stores a plurality of media items (e.g., 'songs, podcasts, etc.) in the file system 3154. When the user wants the electronic device to play a particular media item, a form of available media item is displayed on the display 3160. The user can then use the user input device 3158 to select an item from the available media items. The processor 3152 provides the media material (e.g., sound file) of the particular media item to an encoder/decoder (CODEC) 3163 upon receiving a selection of a particular media item. The CODEC 3163 then produces an analog output signal for the speaker 3 1 64. The speaker 3164 can be a speaker inside the electronic device 3150 or a speaker external to the electronic device 3150. For example, a headset or earphone connected to the electronic device 3150 can be considered an external speaker. M430792 The electronic device 3150 also includes a network/bus interface 3161 coupled to a data link 3162. The data link 3162 allows the electronic device 3150 to be coupled to a host computer or accessory device. The data link 3162 can be provided on a wired connection or a wireless connection. In the example of a wireless connection, the network/bus interface 3161 can include a wireless transceiver. Such media projects (media assets) may be related to one or more different kinds of media content. In one embodiment, the media items are soundtracks (eg, songs, audiobooks, and podcasts). In another embodiment, the media items can be images (e.g., photos). However, in other embodiments, the media items can be any combination of audio, picture or visual content. The sensor 3 1 76 can be in the form of a circuit for detecting any number of stimuli. For example, sensor 3176 can include a Hall effect sensor, a sound sensor, a light sensor (e.g., a photometer), or the like that is responsive to an external magnetic field. The magnetic attachment feature can be used to magnetically attach at least two items. The objects can take many forms and perform many functions. When more magnetically attached than this, the objects communicate and interact with each other to form a cooperative system. The cooperating system can perform operations and provide functions that cannot be provided independently when the objects are separated. For example, at least a first article and a second article can be magnetically attached to each other such that the first article can be constructed to provide the second article-support mechanism. The support mechanism can be mechanical in nature. For example, the first item may be in the form of a pedestal that can be used to support the second item on a work surface, such as a table. In another example, the first item can be in the form of a suspension device. Thus, the first object can be used to hang the second object, which can then be used as a visual content for viewing visual images, such as visual, static images (photographs), artwork, etc., as -79-M430792. Etc., the display. The support mechanism can also be used as a handle for conveniently grasping or grasping the second item. The configuration is particularly useful when the second object can present visual content, such as images (static or visual), text (such as in an e-book), or has image capture capabilities, where the second object has image capture capabilities. In the example, the second item can be used as an image capture device, such as a static or visual camera and the first item can be constructed as a support, such as a tripod and a handle. The described embodiments can take many forms. For example, the attachment can occur between a first item and a second item, wherein the first item and the second item can be in the form of an electronic device. The electronic devices are magnetically attached to each other to form a cooperative electronic system in which the electronic devices can communicate with one another. Information can be transmitted between the first and second electronic devices as part of this communication. The information may be processed in whole or in part at the first or second electronic device depending on the nature of the process. In this manner, the cooperative electronic system can utilize the synergistic effects of a plurality of electronic devices that are magnetically attached and communicate with each other. In one example, the communication can be implemented using any suitable wireless communication protocol, such as Bluetooth (BT), GSM, CDMA, WiFi, and the like. The cooperative electronic system can be in the form of an array of electronic devices. In one embodiment, the array of electronic devices can function as a single integrated display (mosaic or the like). In another embodiment, the array of electronic devices can provide a single function or a set of functions (e.g., a 'virtual keyboard'). In still another embodiment, one of the -80-M430792 of the electronic devices can be in the form of a power providing device that can be attached to the electronic device by using the magnetic attachment feature configuration. The electrical providing device can provide electrical current to the electronic device using a mechanical connection, such as a power connector or, in some instances, a magnetic charging mechanism. This current can be used to charge a battery pack when necessary while providing power to operate the cooperating electronic system. The supplied power can be transferred from one device to another as if it were a bucket bridge to balance the power distribution and battery pack charging in the φ cooperating electronic system. The accessory unit includes an accessory body and a magnetic component pivotally coupled to the accessory body, the magnetic component including a first plurality of magnetic elements arranged along a first straight line to each other in a first relative size Adjacent and arranged according to a first polarity pattern of alternating magnetic poles, and a second plurality of magnetic members arranged along the first straight line in a second relative size to be adjacent to each other and according to a second polarity pattern of alternating magnetic poles Arranged wherein the magnetic component is configured to magnetically attach the accessory unit to a first portion of a host unit. The first and second size dimensions and the first and second polarity patterns are complementary to each other. The first polarity mode is {PI, P2, P1} and the second polarity mode is {P2, P1, P2}, wherein P1 is the first polarity and P2 is the opposite polarity. The first relative size order is { 2L, 1L, 1L} and the second relative size order thereof are {1L, 1L, 2L}, where 1L is an effective unit magnet length and 2L of it is twice the length of the effective unit magnet. A 2L magnetic element includes a configuration of a first 1L magnetic element having a first polarity P1 adjacent to a second 1L magnetic element -81 - M430792 having the first polarity P1, wherein The first 1L magnet and the adjacent second 1L magnet are held together by an externally applied force against the mutually exclusive magnetic force. The magnetic assembly further includes a housing having a front opening and a decouper encased within the housing and attached to the back of the first and second plurality of magnetic elements, the demultiplexer being configured to at least some of the magnetic field lines Redirecting away from the back side of the housing and toward the front opening, thereby increasing the magnetic flux density between the first and second plurality of magnetic elements and a corresponding magnetic element within the body unit. a first end plug is inserted into the first end of the splitter and a second end plug is inserted into a second end of the splitter, wherein the first and second end plugs provide The externally applied force used to hold the 2L magnetic element configuration together, wherein adjacent magnetic elements having opposite magnetic poles are held together by a magnetic force that attracts each other. The magnetic assembly also includes a first end projection pivotally coupled to one end of the housing, a second end projection pivotally coupled to an opposite end of the housing, wherein the first and second ends The projection and the outer casing pivot about a first pivot axis, a rigid connecting rod connecting the first and second end projections, and a sleeve formed to accommodate the rigid connecting rod Inserting the sleeve and the rigid connecting rod into an opening in the fitting body, the rigid connecting rod forming a second pivot axis different from the first pivot axis, the first and second ends The projection pivots with the outer casing about the second pivot axis. The accessory body includes a segmented flap portion having a plurality of segments, wherein an outermost segment portion includes a first magnetic member that cooperates with the magnetic member for magnetically attaching the segmented flap portion to the A second portion of the body unit that is separate from the first portion of the -82-M430792, wherein the segmented flap portion has a size and shape that is consistent with the second portion of the body unit. The first magnetic element includes a plurality of magnetic members. The second portion of the body unit is a display device having an uppermost protective layer. When the segmented flap portion is over the uppermost protective layer, at least one magnetic member that is not used to magnetically attach the accessory unit to the plurality of magnetic members of the body unit is used by the body A sensor in the unit detected it. The sensor facilitates a change in the operational state of the body unit based on the position of the segmented flap portion associated with the protective layer and the segmented flap portion is formed from leather or polyurethane. Various aspects, embodiments, entity examples or features of the described embodiments may be used separately or in combination. The various aspects of the described embodiments can be embodied in a combination of software, hardware, or a combination of hardware and software. The described embodiments can also be embodied as a computer readable code on a non-transitory computer readable medium. The computer readable medium is defined as any data storage device that can store data, which can then be read by a computer system. Examples of such computer readable media include read only memory, random access memory, CD-ROM, DVD, magnetic tape, and optical data storage devices. The computer readable medium can also be distributed over a network coupled computer system such that the computer readable code is stored and executed in a decentralized manner. The above description is intended to provide a complete understanding of the described embodiments. However, it will be apparent to those skilled in the art that the implementation of such described embodiments does not require the specific details of the -83-M430792. Accordingly, the above description of the specific embodiments described herein is provided for the purposes of illustration and description. They are not intended to exhaust or limit the embodiments to the particular form disclosed. It will be apparent to those skilled in the art that there are many possible modifications and variations under the above teachings. The described embodiments have many advantages. Different aspects, embodiments, or entity examples may yield one or more of the following benefits. Many of the features and benefits of the embodiments are apparent from the written description, and thus the scope of the appended claims is intended to cover all such features and advantages. Also, the present invention should not be limited to the construction and operation of one of the illustrated and described embodiments, as many modifications and variations will occur to those skilled in the art. Therefore, appropriate modifications and equivalents are to be construed as falling within the scope of the present invention. BRIEF DESCRIPTION OF THE DRAWINGS The present invention will be readily understood by the following detailed description in conjunction with the accompanying drawings, in which the same reference numerals designate the same structural elements, and in which: Figure 1 is a desired and repeatable A simplified block diagram of an object and an electronic device that are releasably attached to each other. Figure 2A is a simplified perspective view of an article in accordance with a described embodiment. The article can be releasably attached to an electronic device by a side magnetic attachment system. Figure 2B shows the article of Figure 2A and the electronic device attached together in accordance with the side magnetic attachment system. -84 - M430792 Figure 3A is a simplified perspective view of an article releasably attached to an electronic device by a top magnetic attachment system in accordance with an described embodiment. Figure 3B shows the article of Figure 3A and the electronic device being magnetically attached to each other using the top magnetic attachment system to form a corresponding system. Figure 4A is a simplified perspective view of an article releasably attached to an electronic device by the top magnetic attachment system. Figure 4B shows a system of the attached article of Figure 4A in a closed configuration corresponding to the electronic device. Figure 4C shows the configuration of the corresponding system of Figure 4B in an open state. Figure 5 shows a top perspective view of an electronic device in accordance with the described embodiment. Figure 6 shows another embodiment of a magnetic attachment feature configuration. Figure 7A shows an electronic device adjacent to another article in the form of an attachment having a magnetic attachment feature. Figure 7B shows an image representation of the magnetic interaction between the electronic device and the accessory device of Figure 7A in accordance with the described embodiment. Figure 7C shows an image representation of a cooperative system formed by the magnetic attachment of the accessory device and the electronic device of Figures 7A and 7B. Figure 8A shows an embodiment of an attachment feature configuration in an electronic device. Figure 8B shows an embodiment of an attachment feature configuration corresponding to the attachment feature configuration of Figure 8A in an accessory device. -85- M430792 Figure 9A shows a representative surface device attachment feature configuration in an inactive state. Figure 9B shows the situation in which the representative device attachment feature configuration of Figure 9A is actuated by another magnetic attachment feature. Fig. 9C shows the state in which the magnetic attachment feature is constructed to be inactive in the presence of the magnetic object. Figure 10 shows an embodiment of a device attachment feature configuration utilizing a leaf spring arrangement as a securing mechanism. Figure 11A shows an embodiment of a keyed magnetic attachment system and a matched magnetic attachment system in an inactive state. Fig. 11B shows the case where the key magnetic attachment system of Fig. 11A is actuated by the matching magnetic attachment system. Figure 12 shows an offset position for the keyed magnetic attachment system of Figure 11A. Figure 13 shows a graph showing the relationship between the magnetic adhesion and the relative position of the bonded magnetic attachment feature. Figures 14 and 15 show different embodiments of magnetic elements used in the keyed magnetic attachment feature configuration. Figure 16A shows a first perspective view of an electronic device in the form of a tablet device and an accessory device in the form of a protective cover. Figure 16B shows a second perspective view of an electronic device in the form of a tablet device and an accessory device in the form of a protective cover. 17A shows the cooperative system (co 0P erate system) formed by the tablet device and the accessory device shown in Figs. 16A and 16B in the state of the closed configuration M430792. Fig. 1 7B shows the state in which the cooperative system shown in Fig. 17A is in the open configuration. Figure 18 shows a top view of an embodiment of a segmented outer cover assembly. 19A-19C show a detailed view of a hinge span in accordance with the described embodiment.

圖20A顯示圖18所示的區段式外蓋組件附著至一平 板裝置的側視圖。 圖20B-20C顯示圖20A的該區段式外蓋組件與該平 板裝置的剖面圖。 圖 21A顯示磁性地附著至一具有曲面的外殼之圖 1 9 A-19C的該鉸鏈跨距件的實施例的剖面側視圖。 圖21B顯示磁性地附著至一具有平的表面的外殼之該 鉸鏈跨距件的另一實施例的剖面側視圖。 圖22A及22B顯示一用來組裝該依據被描述的實施 例的鉸鏈跨距件的固定件的剖面圖及立體圖。 圖23顯示一被建構來將一平板裝置支撐成鍵盤狀態 的區段式外蓋的側視圖。 圖24A及24B分別顯示該被建構來將一平板裝置支 撐成鍵盤狀態的區段式外蓋的側視圖及立體圖》 圖25A-25B顯示被建構成一懸掛設備的不同實施例 的該區段式外蓋組件。 圖26A及26B分別顯示一具有前及後影像攝取裝置 之平板裝置的前視及後視圖。 -87- M430792 圖27A-27C顯示一在偷窺模式中之一區段式外蓋及 平板裝置的合作系統,其被建構來只啓動一顯示器之被掀 開的部分。 圖28A-28D顯示依據被描述的實施例的一樞接鉸鏈 組件的各種分解圖。 圖29顯示依據被描述的實施例的一上蓋組件的分解 圖。 圖30爲圖29所示的該上蓋組件在一平板裝置上的剖 面圖,其詳示一嵌埋在該上蓋組件內的磁鐵與該平板裝置 內的磁性敏感電路之間的關係。 圖31A顯示一依據被描述的實施例之與處在有作用 的狀態中的相對應的裝置附著特徵構造磁性地嚙合的鉸鏈 跨距件的剖面圖。 圖31B顯示圖31A的該裝置附著特徵構造處在一不 作用的(inactive)狀態中之剖面圖。 圖3 2-3 3顯示一依據被描述的實施例之包含一板片彈 簧作爲固定機構的裝置附著特徵構造的立體圖。 圖34爲一可攜式媒體裝置所使用的功能性模組的配 置的方塊圖》 圖35爲一適合與被描述的實施例一起使用的電子裝 置的方塊圖。 【主要元件符號說明】 1 0 :物件 -88- M430792Figure 20A shows a side view of the segmented outer cover assembly of Figure 18 attached to a flat panel assembly. 20B-20C show cross-sectional views of the segmented outer cover assembly of Fig. 20A and the plate assembly. Figure 21A shows a cross-sectional side view of an embodiment of the hinge span of Figures 19A-19C magnetically attached to a curved outer casing. Figure 21B shows a cross-sectional side view of another embodiment of the hinge span that is magnetically attached to a housing having a flat surface. Figures 22A and 22B show a cross-sectional view and a perspective view of a fixture for assembling the hinge span member in accordance with the described embodiment. Figure 23 shows a side view of a segmented outer cover constructed to support a tablet device in a keyboard state. 24A and 24B respectively show a side view and a perspective view of the segmented cover constructed to support a tablet device in a keyboard state. Figures 25A-25B show the segmented embodiment of a different embodiment constructed to form a suspension device. Cover assembly. 26A and 26B show front and rear views, respectively, of a tablet device having front and rear image pickup devices. -87- M430792 Figures 27A-27C show a cooperative system of a segmented cover and tablet unit in a voyeur mode that is constructed to activate only the opened portion of a display. 28A-28D show various exploded views of a pivot joint assembly in accordance with the described embodiment. Figure 29 shows an exploded view of an upper cover assembly in accordance with the described embodiment. Figure 30 is a cross-sectional view of the upper cover assembly of Figure 29 on a flat panel assembly detailing the relationship between a magnet embedded in the upper cover assembly and a magnetic sensitive circuit within the flat panel assembly. Figure 31A shows a cross-sectional view of a hinge span that is magnetically engaged with a corresponding device attachment feature in an active state in accordance with the described embodiment. Figure 31B shows a cross-sectional view of the device attachment feature configuration of Figure 31A in an inactive state. Figures 32-3 show a perspective view of a device attachment feature configuration including a plate spring as a securing mechanism in accordance with the described embodiment. Figure 34 is a block diagram showing the configuration of a functional module used in a portable media device. Figure 35 is a block diagram of an electronic device suitable for use with the described embodiments. [Main component symbol description] 1 0 : Object -88- M430792

12 :電子裝置 15 :外殼 17 :外殼 1 3 :附著系統 1 4 附著系統 1 3 a :附著特徵構造 14a :附著特徵構造 13b :附著特徵構造 14b :附著特徵構造 1 6 :構件 1 8 :構件 2 0 :物件 22 :電子裝置 24 :磁性表面 26 :嚙合表面 3 0 :物件 32 :電子裝置 34 :磁性附著系統 3 6 :附著系統 3 8 :合作的系統 40 :物件 42 :電子裝置 44 :磁性系統 44a :磁性元件 -89 M430792 44b :磁性元件 46 :合作的系統 50 :摺片 52 :頂面(顯示器) 4 8 ·黏結件 1 00 :電子裝置 102 :外殼 1 0 4 :開口 108 :第一磁性附著特徵構造 110:第二磁性附著特徵構造 1 02a :側壁 120b :側壁 l〇2c :側邊 l〇2d :側邊 1 1 2 :磁場 B i i 2 :磁通量密度12: electronic device 15: outer casing 17: outer casing 13: attachment system 1 4 attachment system 1 3 a : attachment feature configuration 14a: attachment feature configuration 13b: attachment feature configuration 14b: attachment feature configuration 1 6 : member 1 8 : member 2 0: object 22: electronic device 24: magnetic surface 26: meshing surface 30: object 32: electronic device 34: magnetic attachment system 3 6: attachment system 3 8: cooperative system 40: object 42: electronic device 44: magnetic system 44a: magnetic element -89 M430792 44b: magnetic element 46: cooperative system 50: flap 52: top surface (display) 4 8 · bonding piece 1 00: electronic device 102: housing 1 0 4 : opening 108: first magnetic Attachment feature configuration 110: second magnetic attachment feature configuration 102a: sidewall 120b: sidewall l〇2c: side l〇2d: side 1 1 2 : magnetic field B ii 2 : magnetic flux density

Bthresh()ld :磁通量密度門檻値 1 1 6 :磁性元件 1 1 8 :霍耳效應感測器 1 20 :羅盤 1 2 6 :磁性元件 1 2 8 :磁性元件 200 :物件(配件裝置) 202 :磁性附著特徵構造 M430792 2 Ο 8 :磁場 204 :磁性元件 206 :磁性元件 216:磁性附著特徵構造 2 1 4 :區域 2 1 8 :嚙合表面Bthresh()ld: magnetic flux density threshold 1 1 6 : magnetic element 1 1 8 : Hall effect sensor 1 20 : compass 1 2 6 : magnetic element 1 2 8 : magnetic element 200 : object (accessory device) 202 : Magnetic attachment feature construction M430792 2 Ο 8 : Magnetic field 204 : Magnetic element 206 : Magnetic element 216 : Magnetic attachment feature 2 1 4 : Area 2 1 8 : Engagement surface

3 00 :合作的系統 402 :磁性元件 404 :突出部 4 1 0 :磁性元件 4 1 4 :磁性元件 5.00 :磁性附著特徵構造 5 02 :磁性元件 5 0 6 :物件 600 :裝置附著特徵構造 602 :磁性元件 604 :磁性元件 606 :彈簧 608 :彈簧 700 :裝置附著特徵構造 702 :磁性組件 7 1 2 a :磁鐵 7 12b :磁鐵 712c :磁鐵 -91 M430792 714a :磁鐵 714b :磁鐵 714c :磁鐵 800 :配件附著特徵構造 802 :磁性組件 802a :磁鐵 802b :磁鐵3 00 : Cooperative system 402 : Magnetic element 404 : Projection 4 1 0 : Magnetic element 4 1 4 : Magnetic element 5.00 : Magnetic attachment feature configuration 5 02 : Magnetic element 5 0 6 : Object 600 : Device attachment feature configuration 602 : Magnetic element 604: Magnetic element 606: Spring 608: Spring 700: Device attachment feature 702: Magnetic component 7 1 2 a : Magnet 7 12b: Magnet 712c: Magnet - 91 M430792 714a: Magnet 714b: Magnet 714c: Magnet 800: Accessories Attachment feature 802: magnetic component 802a: magnet 802b: magnet

802c :磁鐵 804a :磁鐵 804b :磁鐵 8 0 4 c :磁鐵 7 1 6 :中心線 900 :圖表 1000 :配置 1 002 :配置802c: magnet 804a: magnet 804b: magnet 8 0 4 c: magnet 7 1 6 : center line 900 : chart 1000 : configuration 1 002 : configuration

1 004 :經過編碼的磁性序列 1 200 :蓋子組件 1100·平板裝置 1102 :外殼 1 1 0 4 :開口 1 106 :覆蓋玻璃 1108:資料埠 1 1 1 2 :主頁按鈕 1202 :摺片 -92- M430792 1 204 :鉸鏈組件 1206:內層 1 300 :片段式蓋子組件 1 3 0 2 :本體 1 304 :片段 1 305 :片段 1 3 06 :片段 1 3 07:片段 1308 :片段 1 309 :片段 1 3 1 0 :片段 1312:可摺疊的部分 1 3 1 4 :插入件 1 3 1 6 :插入件 1 3 1 8 :插入件 1 3 2 0 :插入件 1 322 :磁性元件 1 3 24 :插入件 1 3 2 8 :第一端凸部 1 3 3 0 :第二端凸部 1 3 3 2 :連接桿 1 3 3 3 :樞轉軸線 1 3 3 6 :保護層 1 3 3 8 :保護層 -93 M430792 1 340 :鉸鏈跨距件 1 342 :鉸鏈柱 1 344 :保護層(標籤)1 004 : Encoded magnetic sequence 1 200 : Cover assembly 1100 · Flat panel device 1102 : Housing 1 1 0 4 : Opening 1 106 : Cover glass 1108 : Data 埠 1 1 1 2 : Home button 1202 : Fold - 92 - M430792 1 204: hinge assembly 1206: inner layer 1 300: segmented lid assembly 1 3 0 2 : body 1 304: segment 1 305: segment 1 3 06: segment 1 3 07: segment 1308: segment 1 309: segment 1 3 1 0: Fragment 1312: Foldable portion 1 3 1 4 : Insert 1 3 1 6 : Insert 1 3 1 8 : Insert 1 3 2 0 : Insert 1 322 : Magnetic element 1 3 24 : Insert 1 3 2 8 : first end convex portion 1 3 3 0 : second end convex portion 1 3 3 2 : connecting rod 1 3 3 3 : pivot axis 1 3 3 6 : protective layer 1 3 3 8 : protective layer - 93 M430792 1 340 : Hinge span 1 342 : Hinge post 1 344 : Protective layer (label)

1400:鉸鏈跨距件 1 402 :磁性元件 1 404 :塡料材料 1 4 1 0 :鉸鏈跨距件 1412 :端部 1 4 1 4 :間隔件1400: hinge span 1 402 : magnetic element 1 404 : dip material 1 4 1 0 : hinge span 1412 : end 1 4 1 4 : spacer

1 5 0 0 :鉸鏈跨距件的剖面側視圖 1 5 02 :磁性元件 1 504 :磁性元件 1 506 :內表面 1 5 08:外表面 1 5 1 0 :分磁器 1512 :外殼 1 5 5 0 :鉸鏈跨距件的剖面側視圖 1 5 5 4 :磁鐵 1 600 :夾具 1 602 :表面 1 700 :三角形支撐結構 1 702 :觸碰敏感表面 1 9 0 0 :懸掛件 1 9 1 0 :懸掛件 -94- M430792 2000 :配置1 5 0 0 : cross-sectional side view of the hinge span 1 5 02 : magnetic element 1 504 : magnetic element 1 506 : inner surface 1 5 08 : outer surface 1 5 1 0 : splitter 1512 : outer casing 1 5 5 0 : Cross-sectional side view of the hinge span 1 5 5 4 : Magnet 1 600 : Clamp 1 602 : Surface 1 700 : Triangular support structure 1 702 : Touch sensitive surface 1 9 0 0 : Suspension 1 9 1 0 : Suspension - 94- M430792 2000 : Configuration

2002:面向前方的照相機 2004:面向前方的照相機 2 100 :蓋子組件的組態 2102 :外露的部分 2104 :圖像 2106 :第二部分 2 1 0 8 :圖像 2200 :蓋子組件 2202 :片段式蓋子組件 2 2 0 4 :樞轉組件 2206 :端凸部 22 0 8 :端凸部 2210 :鉸鏈跨距件 2 2 1 2 :連接桿2002: Camera facing forward 2004: Camera facing forward 2 100: Configuration of the cover assembly 2102: exposed portion 2104: image 2106: second portion 2 1 0 8 : image 2200: cover assembly 2202: fragment cover Assembly 2 2 0 4 : pivoting assembly 2206 : end projection 22 0 8 : end projection 2210 : hinge span 2 2 1 2 : connecting rod

2216 :樞轉軸線 221 8 :樞轉軸線 2220 :標籤 2222 :緩衝器 2224 :端銷 2226 :端銷 2228 :磁性元件 2228- 1 :磁性元件 -95- M4307922216: pivot axis 221 8 : pivot axis 2220 : label 2222 : bumper 2224 : end pin 2226 : end pin 2228 : magnetic element 2228-1 : magnetic element -95- M430792

2228-2 :磁性元件 2232- 1 :插塞 2232-2 :插塞 2228-3 :磁鐵 2228-4 :磁鐵 2234 :間隔件 2 2 3 6 :分磁器 2238 :開□ 2250 :底層 2 2 5 2 :強化層 2 2 5 4 :插入件 2 2 5 6 :黏劑層 225 8 :層疊材料 2 2 5 4 - 1 :插入件 2260 :磁鐵2228-2: Magnetic element 2223-2: Plug 2232-2: Plug 2228-3: Magnet 2228-4: Magnet 2234: Spacer 2 2 3 6 : Splitter 2238: Open □ 2250: Bottom 2 2 5 2 : Strengthening layer 2 2 5 4 : Insert 2 2 5 6 : Adhesive layer 225 8 : Laminate material 2 2 5 4 - 1 : Insert 2260 : Magnet

2 2 6 0 - 1 :磁鐵 2254-2 :片段 2 2 6 2 :作用板 2264 :頂層 2 2 6 6 :強化桿 2300 :裝置附著特徵構造 2302 :磁性元件 2 3 0 4 :分磁器 2306 :嚙合表面 -96- M4307922 2 6 0 - 1 : Magnet 2254-2 : Fragment 2 2 6 2 : Actuator 2264 : Top layer 2 2 6 6 : Reinforcement rod 2300 : Device attachment feature 2302 : Magnetic element 2 3 0 4 : Separator 2306 : Engage Surface-96- M430792

_L 3。〇於:年月H 2308 :桶 2400 :附著特徵構造 2402 :磁性元件_L 3. 〇: Year H 2308 : Barrel 2400 : Attachment Features 2402 : Magnetic Components

2 4 0 4 :分磁器 2406 :板片彈簧 2408 :緊束件 2410 :端支撐件 2412 :緊束件 2414 :對準柱2 4 0 4 : Separator 2406 : Plate spring 2408 : Tightening member 2410 : End support 2412 : Tightening member 2414 : Alignment column

-97--97-

Claims (1)

M430792M430792 、申請專利範圍 1.—種用來至少保護一平板電腦的顯示器的護蓋,包 含: 一附著機構; —可撓曲的本體部分’其樞軸地連接至該附著機構, 該本體部分具有與該顯示器一致的尺寸及形狀,且包含: —第一端,其位在該附著機構上:及 一與該第一端相對立的第二端,其包含多個磁 鐵’在一閉合組態中,當該本體部分全部與該顯示器接觸 時,該等磁鐵中的至少一個磁鐵可被一在該平板電腦內的 感測器偵測,其中在該閉合組態時該至少一磁鐵被該感測 器偵測到的該偵測會造成該平板電腦改變該平板電腦目前 的操作狀態。 2 .如申請專利範圍第1項所述之護蓋,其中該感測器 是一霍耳效應(Hall Effect,HFX)感測器,其只有在該本體 部分於閉合狀態中與該顯示器接觸時才偵測該至少一磁鐵 產生的磁場。 3. 如申請專利範圍第2項所述之護蓋,其中當該HFX 感測器偵測到該磁場時,該HFX感測器會造成該平板電 腦讓整個顯示器失能(disable)。 4. 如申請專利範圍第3項所述之護蓋,其中在打開組 態時,該HFX感測器不偵測該磁場且該平板電腦的整個 顯示器被賦予呈現視覺內容的能力。 5.如申請專利範圍第3項所述之護蓋,該護蓋更包含: M43.0792 i&inrw^ I 年 a 一: ; /·' 一摺疊區,其允許該第一端及第二端彼此獨立地摺 疊,使得當該護蓋是在一部分打開的組態時,該第一端保 持與該顯示器接觸及該第二端被摺疊離開該顯示器以露出 • 該顯示器的一第一部分,該第一部分小於整個顯示器,造 成該平板電腦只在該顯示器的該第一部分呈現視覺內容。 6.如申請專利範圍第5項所述之護蓋,其中該本體部 分更包含: φ 一在該第一端的第一片段;及 一在該第二端的第二片段,該第一及第二片段被該摺 疊區可摺疊地連接。 7 .如申請專利範圍第6項所述之護蓋,其中該第二片 段包含: 一堅硬的插入件,其具有與該第二片段一致的尺寸及 形狀,其中該等多個磁鐵被埋設在該堅硬的插入件內且在 該閉合組態時可被該HFX感測器偵測的該至少一磁鐵係 # 位在一個當該護蓋在閉合組態時靠近該HFX感測器的位 置。 8 .如申請專利範圍第7項所述之護蓋,其中該第一片 段包含: 一堅硬的且可磁性地附著的插入件,其具有與該第一 片段一致的尺寸及形狀,其中在一摺疊的組態中,該第一 片段與該第二片段彼此被摺疊在一起致使一磁性附著被形 成在該堅硬的且可磁性地附著的插入件與該等多個磁鐵的 至少一磁鐵之間以形成一適合用來支撐該平板電腦的結 -99- M430792 f II I '〜.·.. mK3. .07* 5Patent Application No. 1. A cover for protecting at least one display of a tablet computer, comprising: an attachment mechanism; - a flexible body portion that is pivotally coupled to the attachment mechanism, the body portion having The display is of uniform size and shape and comprises: - a first end positioned on the attachment mechanism: and a second end opposite the first end, the plurality of magnets comprising a plurality of magnets in a closed configuration When the body portion is all in contact with the display, at least one of the magnets can be detected by a sensor in the tablet, wherein the at least one magnet is sensed during the closed configuration The detection detected by the device causes the tablet to change the current operating state of the tablet. 2. The cover of claim 1, wherein the sensor is a Hall Effect (HFX) sensor that is only in contact with the display when the body portion is in a closed state. The magnetic field generated by the at least one magnet is detected. 3. The cover of claim 2, wherein when the HFX sensor detects the magnetic field, the HFX sensor causes the tablet to disable the entire display. 4. The cover of claim 3, wherein the HFX sensor does not detect the magnetic field when the configuration is turned on and the entire display of the tablet is rendered capable of presenting visual content. 5. The cover of claim 3, wherein the cover further comprises: M43.0792 i&inrw^ I year a: ; /·' a folding zone that allows the first end and the second The ends are folded independently of each other such that when the cover is in a partially open configuration, the first end remains in contact with the display and the second end is folded away from the display to expose a first portion of the display, The first portion is smaller than the entire display, causing the tablet to present visual content only in the first portion of the display. 6. The cover of claim 5, wherein the body portion further comprises: φ a first segment at the first end; and a second segment at the second end, the first and the first The two segments are foldably connected by the folded region. 7. The cover of claim 6, wherein the second segment comprises: a rigid insert having a size and shape consistent with the second segment, wherein the plurality of magnets are embedded The at least one magnet system # within the rigid insert and detectable by the HFX sensor in the closed configuration is in a position near the HFX sensor when the cover is in the closed configuration. 8. The cover of claim 7, wherein the first segment comprises: a rigid and magnetically attachable insert having a size and shape consistent with the first segment, wherein In a folded configuration, the first segment and the second segment are folded together such that a magnetic attachment is formed between the rigid and magnetically attachable insert and at least one of the plurality of magnets To form a knot suitable for supporting the tablet -99- M430792 f II I '~.... mK3. .07* 5
TW100217428U 2010-09-17 2011-03-09 Protective cover arranged to protect a display of a tablet computer TWM430792U (en)

Applications Claiming Priority (3)

Application Number Priority Date Filing Date Title
US38417910P 2010-09-17 2010-09-17
US37519710A 2010-09-17 2010-09-17
US12/971,624 US8264310B2 (en) 2010-09-17 2010-12-17 Accessory device for peek mode

Publications (1)

Publication Number Publication Date
TWM430792U true TWM430792U (en) 2012-06-01

Family

ID=46139187

Family Applications (2)

Application Number Title Priority Date Filing Date
TW100217428U TWM430792U (en) 2010-09-17 2011-03-09 Protective cover arranged to protect a display of a tablet computer
TW100204174U TWM427598U (en) 2010-09-17 2011-03-09 Accessory device and pivoting magnetic assembly

Family Applications After (1)

Application Number Title Priority Date Filing Date
TW100204174U TWM427598U (en) 2010-09-17 2011-03-09 Accessory device and pivoting magnetic assembly

Country Status (2)

Country Link
KR (2) KR101175903B1 (en)
TW (2) TWM430792U (en)

Cited By (3)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
TWI495988B (en) * 2013-01-02 2015-08-11 Compal Electronics Inc Electric apparatus
US9170613B2 (en) 2013-05-02 2015-10-27 Compal Electronics, Inc. Connecting assembly and electronic device having the same
US9232306B2 (en) 2012-06-10 2016-01-05 Apple Inc. Systems and methods for reducing stray magnetic flux

Families Citing this family (22)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
US8344836B2 (en) 2010-09-17 2013-01-01 Apple Inc. Protective cover for a tablet computer
US8143982B1 (en) 2010-09-17 2012-03-27 Apple Inc. Foldable accessory device
US9729685B2 (en) * 2011-09-28 2017-08-08 Apple Inc. Cover for a tablet device
KR101991940B1 (en) * 2012-08-08 2019-06-24 삼성전자주식회사 Portable electronic apparatus
CN103729026B (en) * 2012-10-16 2017-09-01 华硕电脑股份有限公司 Protection cap
TWI512437B (en) * 2012-11-15 2015-12-11 Compal Electronics Inc Electronic apparatus and connection structure
JP5820545B2 (en) * 2012-11-28 2015-11-24 インテル・コーポレーション Hinge configuration of electronic devices
CN103885539B (en) 2012-12-20 2017-03-01 华硕电脑股份有限公司 Electronic installation
KR102104444B1 (en) * 2013-01-24 2020-04-24 엘지전자 주식회사 Rear cover and display apparatus including the same
KR20140118280A (en) * 2013-03-28 2014-10-08 인텔렉추얼디스커버리 주식회사 Smart device and method for controlling dynamic display using cover unit
EP2787414B1 (en) 2013-04-02 2016-07-27 Samsung Electronics Co., Ltd. Method of controlling touch screen and electronic device thereof
TWI485554B (en) * 2013-05-08 2015-05-21 Asustek Comp Inc Electronic device
KR101629266B1 (en) * 2013-05-10 2016-06-10 엘지전자 주식회사 Pouch and mobile terminal having the same
KR102078618B1 (en) 2013-06-11 2020-02-19 삼성전자주식회사 Cover device having input apparatus and portable terminal thereof
TWI520671B (en) 2013-08-08 2016-02-01 緯創資通股份有限公司 Portable electronic device
US9474345B2 (en) 2013-08-13 2016-10-25 Apple Inc. Magnetic related features of a cover for an electronic device
KR102371445B1 (en) * 2013-11-22 2022-03-08 삼성디스플레이 주식회사 Display device and flexible display device
TWI498714B (en) * 2013-11-28 2015-09-01 Wistron Corp Portable electronic module
CN104127010B (en) 2014-06-27 2016-06-22 小米科技有限责任公司 Protection set and the equipment with protection set
KR20160016061A (en) 2014-08-01 2016-02-15 삼성전자주식회사 Protecting cover
TWI612876B (en) * 2015-08-28 2018-01-21 仁寶電腦工業股份有限公司 Electronic device
KR102229698B1 (en) * 2020-05-06 2021-03-18 이재학 Mobile video recording device using laptop

Family Cites Families (4)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
JP3495249B2 (en) 1998-02-27 2004-02-09 京セラ株式会社 Foldable electronic device
KR100462740B1 (en) 2001-10-12 2004-12-20 삼성전자주식회사 Portable case for taking portable device and portable device set using thereof
KR100807486B1 (en) 2006-05-17 2008-02-25 삼성전기주식회사 Display handset provided with a cover to be auto/semi-automatically open and closed
US20080247749A1 (en) 2007-04-03 2008-10-09 David Law Camera Wrap Cover

Cited By (3)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
US9232306B2 (en) 2012-06-10 2016-01-05 Apple Inc. Systems and methods for reducing stray magnetic flux
TWI495988B (en) * 2013-01-02 2015-08-11 Compal Electronics Inc Electric apparatus
US9170613B2 (en) 2013-05-02 2015-10-27 Compal Electronics, Inc. Connecting assembly and electronic device having the same

Also Published As

Publication number Publication date
KR101190391B1 (en) 2012-10-11
TWM427598U (en) 2012-04-21
KR20120038391A (en) 2012-04-23
KR101175903B1 (en) 2012-08-22
KR20120038415A (en) 2012-04-23

Similar Documents

Publication Publication Date Title
TWI462460B (en) Electronic device with magnetic attachment
TWI468904B (en) Protective cover arranged to protect a display of a tablet computer and method for manufacturing the same
US9773598B2 (en) Cover for an electronic device
TWM430792U (en) Protective cover arranged to protect a display of a tablet computer
AU2011100424A4 (en) Electronic device with magnetic attachment
US20120068919A1 (en) Sensor
US20120069502A1 (en) Magnetic attachment
US20120066873A1 (en) Methods and apparatus for configuring a magnetic attachment system
US20120068797A1 (en) Magnetic attachment system
TWI570539B (en) Protective cover arranged to protect a display of a tablet computer and method for manufacturing the same
AU2013200260B2 (en) Electronic device with magnetic attachment
AU2011224081A1 (en) Accessory device with magnetic attachment

Legal Events

Date Code Title Description
MK4K Expiration of patent term of a granted utility model